comparison etc/NEWS @ 62042:54584b534be1

*** empty log message ***
author Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
date Mon, 02 May 2005 20:58:54 +0000
parents 8d4f9eb1c2fa
children 68790e90773f
comparison
equal deleted inserted replaced
62041:82c6429cf333 62042:54584b534be1
16 16
17 17
18 * Installation Changes in Emacs 22.1 18 * Installation Changes in Emacs 22.1
19 19
20 --- 20 ---
21 ** Emacs includes now support for loading image libraries on demand. 21 ** Emacs now supports new configure options `--program-prefix',
22 (Currently this feature is only used on MS Windows.) You can configure 22 `--program-suffix' and `--program-transform-name' that affect the names of
23 the supported image types and their associated dynamic libraries by 23 installed programs.
24 setting the variable `image-library-alist'. 24
25 25 ---
26 --- 26 ** Emacs can now be built without sound support.
27 ** New translations of the Emacs Tutorial are available in the following
28 languages: Brasilian, Bulgarian, Chinese (both with simplified and
29 traditional characters), French, and Italian. Type `C-u C-h t' to
30 choose one of them in case your language setup doesn't automatically
31 select the right one.
32 27
33 --- 28 ---
34 ** You can build Emacs with Gtk+ widgets by specifying `--with-x-toolkit=gtk' 29 ** You can build Emacs with Gtk+ widgets by specifying `--with-x-toolkit=gtk'
35 when you run configure. This requires Gtk+ 2.0 or newer. This port 30 when you run configure. This requires Gtk+ 2.0 or newer. This port
36 provides a way to display multilingual text in menus (with some caveats). 31 provides a way to display multilingual text in menus (with some caveats).
37 32
38 --- 33 ---
39 ** Emacs can now be built without sound support.
40
41 ---
42 ** The `emacsserver' program has been removed, replaced with elisp code. 34 ** The `emacsserver' program has been removed, replaced with elisp code.
43
44 ---
45 ** Emacs now supports new configure options `--program-prefix',
46 `--program-suffix' and `--program-transform-name' that affect the names of
47 installed programs.
48 35
49 --- 36 ---
50 ** By default, Emacs now uses a setgid helper program to update game 37 ** By default, Emacs now uses a setgid helper program to update game
51 scores. The directory ${localstatedir}/games/emacs is the normal 38 scores. The directory ${localstatedir}/games/emacs is the normal
52 place for game scores to be stored. This may be controlled by the 39 place for game scores to be stored. This may be controlled by the
76 together with the Emacs User Manual, into the Info directory. A menu 63 together with the Emacs User Manual, into the Info directory. A menu
77 item was added to the menu bar that makes it easy accessible 64 item was added to the menu bar that makes it easy accessible
78 (Help->More Manuals->Introduction to Emacs Lisp). 65 (Help->More Manuals->Introduction to Emacs Lisp).
79 66
80 --- 67 ---
68 ** New translations of the Emacs Tutorial are available in the following
69 languages: Brasilian, Bulgarian, Chinese (both with simplified and
70 traditional characters), French, and Italian. Type `C-u C-h t' to
71 choose one of them in case your language setup doesn't automatically
72 select the right one.
73
74 ---
75 ** A French translation of the `Emacs Survival Guide' is available.
76
77 ---
78 ** Emacs now includes support for loading image libraries on demand.
79 (Currently this feature is only used on MS Windows.) You can configure
80 the supported image types and their associated dynamic libraries by
81 setting the variable `image-library-alist'.
82
83 ---
81 ** Support for Cygwin was added. 84 ** Support for Cygwin was added.
82 85
83 --- 86 ---
84 ** Support for FreeBSD/Alpha has been added. 87 ** Support for FreeBSD/Alpha has been added.
85 88
97 ** Mac OS 9 port now uses the Carbon API by default. You can also 100 ** Mac OS 9 port now uses the Carbon API by default. You can also
98 create non-Carbon build by specifying `NonCarbon' as a target. See 101 create non-Carbon build by specifying `NonCarbon' as a target. See
99 the files mac/README and mac/INSTALL for build instructions. 102 the files mac/README and mac/INSTALL for build instructions.
100 103
101 --- 104 ---
102 ** A French translation of the `Emacs Survival Guide' is available.
103
104 ---
105 ** Building with -DENABLE_CHECKING does not automatically build with union 105 ** Building with -DENABLE_CHECKING does not automatically build with union
106 types any more. Add -DUSE_LISP_UNION_TYPE if you want union types. 106 types any more. Add -DUSE_LISP_UNION_TYPE if you want union types.
107 107
108 108
109 * Changes in Emacs 22.1 109 * Changes in Emacs 22.1
110 110
111 ** New command line option -Q or --quick.
112 This is like using -q --no-site-file, but in addition it also disables
113 the fancy startup screen.
114
115 +++
116 ** New command line option -D or --basic-display.
117 Disables the menu-bar, the tool-bar, the scroll-bars, tool tips, and
118 the blinking cursor.
119
120 +++
121 ** New command line option -nbc or --no-blinking-cursor disables
122 the blinking cursor on graphical terminals.
123
124 +++
125 ** The command line option --no-windows has been changed to
126 --no-window-system. The old one still works, but is deprecated.
127
128 +++
129 ** The -f option, used from the command line to call a function,
130 now reads arguments for the function interactively if it is
131 an interactively callable function.
132
133 +++
134 ** Emacs can now be invoked in full-screen mode on a windowed display.
135 When Emacs is invoked on a window system, the new command-line options
136 `--fullwidth', `--fullheight', and `--fullscreen' produce a frame
137 whose width, height, or both width and height take up the entire
138 screen size. (For now, this does not work with some window managers.)
139
140 +++
141 ** Emacs now displays a splash screen by default even if command-line
142 arguments were given. The new command-line option --no-splash
143 disables the splash screen; see also the variable
144 `inhibit-startup-message' (which is also aliased as
145 `inhibit-splash-screen').
146
147 +++
148 ** New user option `inhibit-startup-buffer-menu'.
149 When loading many files, for instance with `emacs *', Emacs normally
150 displays a buffer menu. This option turns the buffer menu off.
151
152 +++
153 ** Init file changes
154 You can now put the init files .emacs and .emacs_SHELL under
155 ~/.emacs.d or directly under ~. Emacs will find them in either place.
156
157 +++
158 ** Emacs now reads the standard abbrevs file ~/.abbrev_defs
159 automatically at startup, if it exists. When Emacs offers to save
160 modified buffers, it saves the abbrevs too if they have changed. It
161 can do this either silently or asking for confirmation first,
162 according to the value of `save-abbrevs'.
163
164 +++
165 ** The mode line position information now comes before the major mode.
166 When the file is maintained under version control, that information
167 appears between the position information and the major mode.
168
169 +++
170 ** M-g is now a prefix key.
171 M-g g and M-g M-g run goto-line.
172 M-g n and M-g M-n run next-error (like C-x `).
173 M-g p and M-g M-p run previous-error.
174
175 +++
176 ** M-o now is the prefix key for setting text properties;
177 M-o M-o requests refontification.
178
179 +++
180 ** C-u M-x goto-line now switches to the most recent previous buffer,
181 and goes to the specified line in that buffer.
182
183 When goto-line starts to execute, if there's a number in the buffer at
184 point then it acts as the default argument for the minibuffer.
185
186 +++
187 ** You can now switch buffers in a cyclic order with C-x C-left and
188 (prev-buffer) and C-x C-right (next-buffer). C-x left and C-x right
189 can be used as well.
190
191 +++
192 ** New command `Buffer-menu-toggle-files-only' toggles display of file
193 buffers only in the Buffer Menu. It is bound to `T' in Buffer Menu
194 mode.
195
196 +++
197 ** `buffer-menu' and `list-buffers' now list buffers whose names begin
198 with a space, when those buffers are visiting files. Normally buffers
199 whose names begin with space are omitted.
200
201 ---
202 ** The new options `buffers-menu-show-directories' and
203 `buffers-menu-show-status' let you control how buffers are displayed
204 in the menu dropped down when you click "Buffers" from the menu bar.
205
206 `buffers-menu-show-directories' controls whether the menu displays
207 leading directories as part of the file name visited by the buffer.
208 If its value is `unless-uniquify', the default, directories are
209 shown unless uniquify-buffer-name-style' is non-nil. The value of nil
210 and t turn the display of directories off and on, respectively.
211
212 `buffers-menu-show-status' controls whether the Buffers menu includes
213 the modified and read-only status of the buffers. By default it is
214 t, and the status is shown.
215
216 Setting these variables directly does not take effect until next time
217 the Buffers menu is regenerated.
218
219 +++
220 ** The old bindings C-M-delete and C-M-backspace have been deleted,
221 since there are situations where one or the other will shut down
222 the operating system or your X server.
223
224 +++
225 ** `undo-only' does an undo which does not redo any previous undo.
226
227 +++
228 ** When the undo information of the current command gets really large
229 (beyond the value of `undo-outer-limit'), Emacs discards it and warns
230 you about it.
231
232 +++
233 ** M-SPC (just-one-space) when given a numeric argument N
234 converts whitespace around point to N spaces.
235
236 ---
237 ** New command `kill-whole-line' kills an entire line at once.
238 By default, it is bound to C-S-<backspace>.
239
240 +++
241 ** Yanking text now discards certain text properties that can
242 be inconvenient when you did not expect them. The variable
243 `yank-excluded-properties' specifies which ones. Insertion
244 of register contents and rectangles also discards these properties.
245
246 +++
247 ** The default values of paragraph-start and indent-line-function have
248 been changed to reflect those used in Text mode rather than those used
249 in Indented-Text mode.
250
251 +++
252 ** Movement commands `beginning-of-buffer', `end-of-buffer',
253 `beginning-of-defun', `end-of-defun' do not set the mark if the mark
254 is already active in Transient Mark mode.
255
256 +++
257 ** The parameters of automatic hscrolling can now be customized.
258 The variable `hscroll-margin' determines how many columns away from
259 the window edge point is allowed to get before automatic hscrolling
260 will horizontally scroll the window. The default value is 5.
261
262 The variable `hscroll-step' determines how many columns automatic
263 hscrolling scrolls the window when point gets too close to the
264 window edge. If its value is zero, the default, Emacs scrolls the
265 window so as to center point. If its value is an integer, it says how
266 many columns to scroll. If the value is a floating-point number, it
267 gives the fraction of the window's width to scroll the window.
268
269 The variable `automatic-hscrolling' was renamed to
270 `auto-hscroll-mode'. The old name is still available as an alias.
271
272 +++
273 ** A prefix argument is no longer required to repeat a jump to a
274 previous mark, i.e. C-u C-SPC C-SPC C-SPC ... cycles through the
275 mark ring. Use C-u C-u C-SPC to set the mark immediately after a jump.
276
277 +++
278 ** Marking commands extend the region when invoked multiple times. If
279 you hit M-C-SPC (mark-sexp), M-@ (mark-word), M-h (mark-paragraph), or
280 C-M-h (mark-defun) repeatedly, the marked region extends each time, so
281 you can mark the next two sexps with M-C-SPC M-C-SPC, for example.
282 This feature also works for mark-end-of-sentence, if you bind that to
283 a key. It also extends the region when the mark is active in Transient
284 Mark mode, regardless of the last command. To start a new region with
285 one of marking commands in Transient Mark mode, you can deactivate the
286 active region with C-g, or set the new mark with C-SPC.
287
288 +++
289 ** M-h (mark-paragraph) now accepts a prefix arg.
290 With positive arg, M-h marks the current and the following paragraphs;
291 if the arg is negative, it marks the current and the preceding
292 paragraphs.
293
294 +++
295 ** Some commands do something special in Transient Mark mode when the
296 mark is active--for instance, they limit their operation to the
297 region. Even if you don't normally use Transient Mark mode, you might
298 want to get this behavior from a particular command. There are two
299 ways you can enable Transient Mark mode and activate the mark, for one
300 command only.
301
302 One method is to type C-SPC C-SPC; this enables Transient Mark mode
303 and sets the mark at point. The other method is to type C-u C-x C-x.
304 This enables Transient Mark mode temporarily but does not alter the
305 mark or the region.
306
307 After these commands, Transient Mark mode remains enabled until you
308 deactivate the mark. That typically happens when you type a command
309 that alters the buffer, but you can also deactivate the mark by typing
310 C-g.
311
312 +++
313 ** find-file-read-only visits multiple files in read-only mode,
314 when the file name contains wildcard characters.
315
316 +++
317 ** find-alternate-file replaces the current file with multiple files,
318 when the file name contains wildcard characters.
319
320 +++
321 ** Auto Compression mode is now enabled by default.
322
323 ---
324 ** C-x C-f RET, typing nothing in the minibuffer, is no longer a special case.
325
326 Since the default input is the current directory, this has the effect
327 of specifying the current directory. Normally that means to visit the
328 directory with Dired.
329
330 +++
331 ** When you are root, and you visit a file whose modes specify
332 read-only, the Emacs buffer is now read-only too. Type C-x C-q if you
333 want to make the buffer writable. (As root, you can in fact alter the
334 file.)
335
336 +++
337 ** C-x s (save-some-buffers) now offers an option `d' to diff a buffer
338 against its file, so you can see what changes you would be saving.
339
340 +++
341 ** The commands copy-file, rename-file, make-symbolic-link and
342 add-name-to-file, when given a directory as the "new name" argument,
343 convert it to a file name by merging in the within-directory part of
344 the existing file's name. (This is the same convention that shell
345 commands cp, mv, and ln follow.) Thus, M-x copy-file RET ~/foo RET
346 /tmp RET copies ~/foo to /tmp/foo.
347
348 ---
349 ** When used interactively, `format-write-file' now asks for confirmation
350 before overwriting an existing file, unless a prefix argument is
351 supplied. This behavior is analogous to `write-file'.
352
353 ---
354 ** The variable `auto-save-file-name-transforms' now has a third element that
355 controls whether or not the function `make-auto-save-file-name' will
356 attempt to construct a unique auto-save name (e.g. for remote files).
357
358 +++
359 ** The max size of buffers and integers has been doubled.
360 On 32bit machines, it is now 256M (i.e. 268435455).
361
362 +++
363 ** If the user visits a file larger than `large-file-warning-threshold',
364 Emacs prompts her for confirmation.
365
366 +++
367 ** There's a new face `minibuffer-prompt'.
368 Emacs adds this face to the list of text properties stored in the
369 variable `minibuffer-prompt-properties', which is used to display the
370 prompt string.
371
372 ---
373 ** Enhanced visual feedback in *Completions* buffer.
374
375 Completions lists use faces to highlight what all completions
376 have in common and where they begin to differ.
377
378 The common prefix shared by all possible completions uses the face
379 `completions-common-part', while the first character that isn't the
380 same uses the face `completions-first-difference'. By default,
381 `completions-common-part' inherits from `default', and
382 `completions-first-difference' inherits from `bold'. The idea of
383 `completions-common-part' is that you can use it to make the common
384 parts less visible than normal, so that the rest of the differing
385 parts is, by contrast, slightly highlighted.
386
387 +++
388 ** File-name completion can now ignore directories.
389 If an element of the list in `completion-ignored-extensions' ends in a
390 slash `/', it indicates a subdirectory that should be ignored when
391 completing file names. Elements of `completion-ignored-extensions'
392 which do not end in a slash are never considered when a completion
393 candidate is a directory.
394
395 +++
396 ** The completion commands TAB, SPC and ? in the minibuffer apply only
397 to the text before point. If there is text in the buffer after point,
398 it remains unchanged.
399
400 +++
401 ** New user option `history-delete-duplicates'.
402 If set to t when adding a new history element, all previous identical
403 elements are deleted.
404
405 +++
406 ** You can now customize fill-nobreak-predicate to control where
407 filling can break lines. The value is now normally a list of
408 functions, but it can also be a single function, for compatibility.
409
410 We provide two sample predicates, fill-single-word-nobreak-p and
411 fill-french-nobreak-p, for use in the value of fill-nobreak-predicate.
412
413 +++
414 ** require-final-newline now has two new possible values:
415
416 `visit' means add a newline (as an undoable change) if it's needed
417 when visiting the file.
418
419 `visit-save' means add a newline (as an undoable change) if it's
420 needed when visiting the file, and also add a newline if it's needed
421 when saving the file.
422
423 +++
424 ** The new option mode-require-final-newline controls how certain
425 major modes enable require-final-newline. Any major mode that's
426 designed for a kind of file that should normally end in a newline
427 sets require-final-newline based on mode-require-final-newline.
428 So you can customize mode-require-final-newline to control what these
429 modes do.
430
431 +++
432 ** Control characters and escape glyphs are now shown in the new
433 escape-glyph face.
434
435 +++
436 ** Non-breaking space and hyphens are now prefixed with an escape
437 character, unless the new user variable `show-nonbreak-escape' is set
438 to nil.
439
440 +++
441 ** In graphical mode, with a C program, GUD Tooltips have been extended to
442 display the #define directive associated with an identifier when program is
443 not executing.
444
111 ** Moving or scrolling through images (and other lines) taller that 445 ** Moving or scrolling through images (and other lines) taller that
112 the window now works sensible, by automatically adjusting the window's 446 the window now works sensible, by automatically adjusting the window's
113 vscroll property. 447 vscroll property.
114 448
115 +++ 449 +++
116 ** In graphical mode, with a C program, GUD Tooltips have been extended to 450 ** font-lock-lines-before specifies a number of lines before the
117 display the #define directive associated with an identifier when program is 451 current line that should be refontified when you change the buffer.
118 not executing. 452 The default value is 1.
119 453
120 +++ 454 ---
121 ** `comint-use-prompt-regexp-instead-of-fields' has been renamed 455 ** JIT-lock changes
122 `comint-use-prompt-regexp'. The old name has been kept as an alias, 456
123 but declared obsolete. 457 *** The default settings for JIT stealth lock parameters are changed.
124 458 The default value for the user option jit-lock-stealth-time is now 16
125 ** Improved key bindings support when running in an xterm. 459 instead of 3, and the default value of jit-lock-stealth-nice is now
126 When emacs is running in an xterm more key bindings are available. The 460 0.5 instead of 0.125. The new defaults should lower the CPU usage
127 following should work: 461 when Emacs is fontifying in the background.
128 {C,S,C-S,A}-{right,left,up,down,prior,next,delete,insert,F1-12}. 462
129 These key bindings work on xterm from X.org 6.8, they might not work on 463
130 some older versions of xterm, or on some proprietary versions. 464 *** jit-lock can now be delayed with `jit-lock-defer-time'.
131 465
466 If this variable is non-nil, its value should be the amount of Emacs
467 idle time in seconds to wait before starting fontification. For
468 example, if you set `jit-lock-defer-time' to 0.25, fontification will
469 only happen after 0.25s of idle time.
470
471 *** contextual refontification is now separate from stealth fontification.
472
473 jit-lock-defer-contextually is renamed jit-lock-contextually and
474 jit-lock-context-time determines the delay after which contextual
475 refontification takes place.
476
477 +++
478 ** line-move-ignore-invisible now defaults to t.
479
480 ---
481 ** A menu item "Show/Hide" was added to the top-level menu "Options".
482 This menu allows you to turn various display features on and off (such
483 as the fringes, the tool bar, the speedbar, and the menu bar itself).
484 You can also move the vertical scroll bar to either side here or turn
485 it off completely. There is also a menu-item to toggle displaying of
486 current date and time, current line and column number in the
487 mode-line.
488
489 ---
490 ** Speedbar has moved from the "Tools" top level menu to "Show/Hide".
491
492 +++
493 ** On X, MS Windows, and Mac OS, the blinking cursor's "off" state is
494 now controlled by the variable `blink-cursor-alist'.
495
496 +++
497 ** The X resource cursorBlink can be used to turn off cursor blinking.
498
499 +++
500 ** Emacs can produce an underscore-like (horizontal bar) cursor.
501 The underscore cursor is set by putting `(cursor-type . hbar)' in
502 default-frame-alist. It supports variable heights, like the `bar'
503 cursor does.
504
505 +++
506 ** Display of hollow cursors now obeys the buffer-local value (if any)
507 of `cursor-in-non-selected-windows' in the buffer that the cursor
508 appears in.
509
510 +++
511 ** The variable `cursor-in-non-selected-windows' can now be set to any
512 of the recognized cursor types.
513
514 +++
515 ** The new face `mode-line-inactive' is used to display the mode line
516 of non-selected windows. The `mode-line' face is now used to display
517 the mode line of the currently selected window.
518
519 The new variable `mode-line-in-non-selected-windows' controls whether
520 the `mode-line-inactive' face is used.
521
522 +++
523 ** New display feature: focus follows the mouse from one Emacs window
524 to another, even within a frame. If you set the variable
525 mouse-autoselect-window to non-nil value, moving the mouse to a
526 different Emacs window will select that window (minibuffer window can
527 be selected only when it is active). The default is nil, so that this
528 feature is not enabled.
529
530 +++
531 ** On X, when the window manager requires that you click on a frame to
532 select it (give it focus), the selected window and cursor position
533 normally changes according to the mouse click position. If you set
534 the variable x-mouse-click-focus-ignore-position to t, the selected
535 window and cursor position do not change when you click on a frame
536 to give it focus.
537
538 +++
539 ** When you specify a frame size with --geometry, the size applies to
540 all frames you create. A position specified with --geometry only
541 affects the initial frame.
542
543 +++
544 ** You can now customize the use of window fringes. To control this
545 for all frames, use M-x fringe-mode or the Show/Hide submenu of the
546 top-level Options menu, or customize the `fringe-mode' variable. To
547 control this for a specific frame, use the command M-x
548 set-fringe-style.
549
550 +++
551 ** The buffer boundaries (i.e. first and last line in the buffer) may
552 now be marked with angle bitmaps in the fringes. In addition, up and
553 down arrow bitmaps may be shown at the top and bottom of the left or
554 right fringe if the window can be scrolled in either direction.
555
556 This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable
557 `indicate-buffer-boundaries' to a non-nil value. The default value of
558 this variable is found in `default-indicate-buffer-boundaries'.
559
560 If value is `left' or `right', both angle and arrow bitmaps are
561 displayed in the left or right fringe, resp.
562
563 Value may also be an alist which specifies the presense and position
564 of each bitmap individually.
565
566 For example, ((top . left) (t . right)) places the top angle bitmap
567 in left fringe, the bottom angle bitmap in right fringe, and both
568 arrow bitmaps in right fringe. To show just the angle bitmaps in the
569 left fringe, but no arrow bitmaps, use ((top . left) (bottom . left)).
570
571 +++
572 ** On window systems, lines which are exactly as wide as the window
573 (not counting the final newline character) are no longer broken into
574 two lines on the display (with just the newline on the second line).
575 Instead, the newline now "overflows" into the right fringe, and the
576 cursor will be displayed in the fringe when positioned on that newline.
577
578 The new user option 'overflow-newline-into-fringe' may be set to nil to
579 revert to the old behavior of continuing such lines.
580
581 +++
582 ** When display margins are present in a window, the fringes are now
583 displayed between the margins and the buffer's text area, rather than
584 at the edges of the window.
585
586 +++
587 ** A window may now have individual fringe and scroll-bar settings,
588 in addition to the individual display margin settings.
589
590 Such individual settings are now preserved when windows are split
591 horizontally or vertically, a saved window configuration is restored,
592 or when the frame is resized.
593
594 +++
595 ** `special-display-buffer-names' and `special-display-regexps' now
596 understand two new boolean pseudo-frame-parameters `same-frame' and
597 `same-window'.
598
599 +++
600 ** Changes in C-h bindings:
601
602 C-h e displays the *Messages* buffer.
603
604 C-h followed by a control character is used for displaying files
605 that do not change:
606
607 C-h C-f displays the FAQ.
608 C-h C-e displays the PROBLEMS file.
609
610 The info-search bindings on C-h C-f, C-h C-k and C-h C-i
611 have been moved to C-h F, C-h K and C-h S.
612
613 C-h c, C-h k, C-h w, and C-h f now handle remapped interactive commands.
614
615 - C-h c and C-h k report the actual command (after possible remapping)
616 run by the key sequence.
617
618 - C-h w and C-h f on a command which has been remapped now report the
619 command it is remapped to, and the keys which can be used to run
620 that command.
621
622 For example, if C-k is bound to kill-line, and kill-line is remapped
623 to new-kill-line, these commands now report:
624
625 - C-h c and C-h k C-k reports:
626 C-k runs the command new-kill-line
627
628 - C-h w and C-h f kill-line reports:
629 kill-line is remapped to new-kill-line which is on C-k, <deleteline>
630
631 - C-h w and C-h f new-kill-line reports:
632 new-kill-line is on C-k
633
634 ---
635 ** Help commands `describe-function' and `describe-key' now show function
636 arguments in lowercase italics on displays that support it. To change the
637 default, customize face `help-argument-name' or redefine the function
638 `help-default-arg-highlight'.
639
640 +++
641 ** C-h v and C-h f commands now include a hyperlink to the C source for
642 variables and functions defined in C (if the C source is available).
643
644 +++
645 ** Help mode now only makes hyperlinks for faces when the face name is
646 preceded or followed by the word `face'. It no longer makes
647 hyperlinks for variables without variable documentation, unless
648 preceded by one of the words `variable' or `option'. It now makes
649 hyperlinks to Info anchors (or nodes) if the anchor (or node) name is
650 enclosed in single quotes and preceded by `info anchor' or `Info
651 anchor' (in addition to earlier `info node' and `Info node').
652
653 +++
654 ** The new command `describe-char' (C-u C-x =) pops up a buffer with
655 description various information about a character, including its
656 encodings and syntax, its text properties, how to input, overlays, and
657 widgets at point. You can get more information about some of them, by
658 clicking on mouse-sensitive areas or moving there and pressing RET.
659
660 +++
661 ** New command `display-local-help' displays any local help at point
662 in the echo area. It is bound to `C-h .'. It normally displays the
663 same string that would be displayed on mouse-over using the
664 `help-echo' property, but, in certain cases, it can display a more
665 keyboard oriented alternative.
666
667 ---
668 ** New commands `scan-buf-next-region' and `scan-buf-previous-region'
669 move to the start of the next (previous, respectively) region with
670 non-nil help-echo property and display any help found there in the
671 echo area, using `display-local-help'.
672
673 +++
674 ** New user option `help-at-pt-display-when-idle' allows to
675 automatically show the help provided by `display-local-help' on
676 point-over, after suitable idle time. The amount of idle time is
677 determined by the user option `help-at-pt-timer-delay' and defaults
678 to one second. This feature is turned off by default.
679
680 ---
681 ** New commands to operate on pairs of open and close characters:
682 `insert-pair', `delete-pair', `raise-sexp'.
683
684 +++
685 ** In processing a local variables list, Emacs strips the prefix and
686 suffix are from every line before processing all the lines.
687
688 +++
689 ** `apply-macro-to-region-lines' now operates on all lines that begin
690 in the region, rather than on all complete lines in the region.
691
692 +++
693 ** You can now follow links by clicking Mouse-1 on the link.
694
695 Traditionally, Emacs uses a Mouse-1 click to set point and a Mouse-2
696 click to follow a link, whereas most other applications use a Mouse-1
697 click for both purposes, depending on whether you click outside or
698 inside a link. Now the behavior of a Mouse-1 click has been changed
699 to match this context-sentitive dual behavior.
700
701 Depending on the current mode, a Mouse-2 click in Emacs may do much
702 more than just follow a link, so the new Mouse-1 behavior is only
703 activated for modes which explicitly mark a clickable text as a "link"
704 (see the new function `mouse-on-link-p' for details). The Lisp
705 packages that are included in release 22.1 have been adapted to do
706 this, but external packages may not yet support this. However, there
707 is no risk in using such packages, as the worst thing that could
708 happen is that you get the original Mouse-1 behavior when you click
709 on a link, which typically means that you set point where you click.
710
711 If you want to get the original Mouse-1 action also inside a link, you
712 just need to press the Mouse-1 button a little longer than a normal
713 click (i.e. press and hold the Mouse-1 button for half a second before
714 you release it).
715
716 Dragging the Mouse-1 inside a link still performs the original
717 drag-mouse-1 action, typically copy the text.
718
719 You can customize the new Mouse-1 behavior via the new user options
720 `mouse-1-click-follows-link' and `mouse-1-click-in-non-selected-windows'.
721
722 +++
723 ** Emacs normally highlights mouse sensitive text whenever the mouse
724 is over the text. By setting the new variable `mouse-highlight', you
725 can optionally enable mouse highlighting only after you move the
726 mouse, so that highlighting disappears when you press a key. You can
727 also disable mouse highlighting.
728
729 +++
730 ** You can now customize if selecting a region by dragging the mouse
731 shall not copy the selected text to the kill-ring by setting the new
732 variable mouse-drag-copy-region to nil.
733
734 ---
735 ** mouse-wheels can now scroll a specific fraction of the window
736 (rather than a fixed number of lines) and the scrolling is `progressive'.
737
738 ---
739 ** Unexpected yanking of text due to accidental clicking on the mouse
740 wheel button (typically mouse-2) during wheel scrolling is now avoided.
741 This behavior can be customized via the mouse-wheel-click-event and
742 mouse-wheel-inhibit-click-time variables.
743
744 +++
745 ** Under X, mouse-wheel-mode is turned on by default.
746
747 +++
748 ** M-x setenv now expands environment variables of the form `$foo' and
749 `${foo}' in the specified new value of the environment variable. To
750 include a `$' in the value, use `$$'.
751
752 +++
753 ** Unquoted `$' in file names do not signal an error any more when
754 the corresponding environment variable does not exist.
755 Instead, the `$ENVVAR' text is left as is, so that `$$' quoting
756 is only rarely needed.
757
758 ---
759 ** Language environment and various default coding systems are setup
760 more correctly according to the current locale name. If the locale
761 name doesn't specify a charset, the default is what glibc defines.
762 This change may result in using the different coding systems as
763 default in some locale (e.g. vi_VN).
764
765 +++
766 ** The default for the paper size (variable ps-paper-type) is taken
767 from the locale.
768
769 +++
770 ** The keyboard-coding-system is now automatically set based on your
771 current locale settings if you are not using a window system. This
772 may mean that the META key doesn't work but generates non-ASCII
773 characters instead, depending on how the terminal (or terminal
774 emulator) works. Use `set-keyboard-coding-system' (or customize
775 keyboard-coding-system) if you prefer META to work (the old default)
776 or if the locale doesn't describe the character set actually generated
777 by the keyboard. See Info node `Single-Byte Character Support'.
778
779 +++
780 ** The new command `revert-buffer-with-coding-system' (C-x RET r)
781 revisits the current file using a coding system that you specify.
782
783 +++
784 ** New command `recode-region' decodes the region again by a specified
785 coding system.
786
787 +++
788 ** The new command `recode-file-name' changes the encoding of the name
789 of a file.
790
791 ---
792 ** New command `ucs-insert' inserts a character specified by its
793 unicode.
794
795 +++
796 ** The new command `set-file-name-coding-system' (C-x RET F) sets
797 coding system for encoding and decoding file names. A new menu item
798 (Options->Mule->Set Coding Systems->For File Name) invokes this
799 command.
800
801 +++
802 ** New command quail-show-key shows what key (or key sequence) to type
803 in the current input method to input a character at point.
804
805 +++
806 ** Limited support for character `unification' has been added.
807 Emacs now knows how to translate between different representations of
808 the same characters in various Emacs charsets according to standard
809 Unicode mappings. This applies mainly to characters in the ISO 8859
810 sets plus some other 8-bit sets, but can be extended. For instance,
811 translation works amongst the Emacs ...-iso8859-... charsets and the
812 mule-unicode-... ones.
813
814 By default this translation happens automatically on encoding.
815 Self-inserting characters are translated to make the input conformant
816 with the encoding of the buffer in which it's being used, where
817 possible.
818
819 You can force a more complete unification with the user option
820 unify-8859-on-decoding-mode. That maps all the Latin-N character sets
821 into Unicode characters (from the latin-iso8859-1 and
822 mule-unicode-0100-24ff charsets) on decoding. Note that this mode
823 will often effectively clobber data with an iso-2022 encoding.
824
825 ---
826 ** There is support for decoding Greek and Cyrillic characters into
827 either Unicode (the mule-unicode charsets) or the iso-8859 charsets,
828 when possible. The latter are more space-efficient. This is
829 controlled by user option utf-fragment-on-decoding.
830
831 ---
832 ** New language environments: French, Ukrainian, Tajik,
833 Bulgarian, Belarusian, Ukrainian, UTF-8, Windows-1255, Welsh, Latin-6,
834 Latin-7, Lithuanian, Latvian, Swedish, Slovenian, Croatian, Georgian,
835 Italian, Russian, Malayalam, Tamil, Russian, Chinese-EUC-TW. (Set up
836 automatically according to the locale.)
837
838 ---
839 ** New input methods: latin-alt-postfix, latin-postfix, latin-prefix,
840 ukrainian-computer, belarusian, bulgarian-bds, russian-computer,
841 vietnamese-telex, lithuanian-numeric, lithuanian-keyboard,
842 latvian-keyboard, welsh, georgian, rfc1345, ucs, sgml,
843 bulgarian-phonetic, dutch, slovenian, croatian, malayalam-inscript,
844 tamil-inscript.
845
846 ---
847 ** New input method chinese-sisheng for inputting Chinese Pinyin
848 characters.
849
850 ---
132 ** Improved Thai support. A new minor mode `thai-word-mode' (which is 851 ** Improved Thai support. A new minor mode `thai-word-mode' (which is
133 automatically activated if you select Thai as a language 852 automatically activated if you select Thai as a language
134 environment) changes key bindings of most word-oriented commands to 853 environment) changes key bindings of most word-oriented commands to
135 versions which recognize Thai words. Affected commands are 854 versions which recognize Thai words. Affected commands are
136 M-f (forward-word) 855 M-f (forward-word)
138 M-d (kill-word) 857 M-d (kill-word)
139 M-DEL (backward-kill-word) 858 M-DEL (backward-kill-word)
140 M-t (transpose-words) 859 M-t (transpose-words)
141 M-q (fill-paragraph) 860 M-q (fill-paragraph)
142 861
143 +++ 862 ---
144 ** Auto Compression mode is now enabled by default. 863 ** Indian support has been updated.
145 864 The in-is13194 coding system is now Unicode-based. CDAC fonts are
146 ** C-x C-f RET, typing nothing in the minibuffer, is no longer a special case. 865 assumed. There is a framework for supporting various
147 866 Indian scripts, but currently only Devanagari, Malayalam and Tamil are
148 Since the default input is the current directory, this has the effect 867 supported.
149 of specifying the current directory. Normally that means to visit the 868
150 directory with Dired. 869 ---
151 870 ** A UTF-7 coding system is available in the library `utf-7'.
152 --- 871
153 ** fast-lock.el and lazy-lock.el are obsolete. Use jit-lock.el instead. 872 ---
154 873 ** The utf-8/16 coding systems have been enhanced.
155 --- 874 By default, untranslatable utf-8 sequences are simply composed into
156 ** The default settings for JIT stealth lock parameters are changed. 875 single quasi-characters. User option `utf-translate-cjk-mode' (it is
157 The default value for the user option jit-lock-stealth-time is now 16 876 turned on by default) arranges to translate many utf-8 CJK character
158 instead of 3, and the default value of jit-lock-stealth-nice is now 877 sequences into real Emacs characters in a similar way to the Mule-UCS
159 0.5 instead of 0.125. The new defaults should lower the CPU usage 878 system. As this loads a fairly big data on demand, people who are not
160 when Emacs is fontifying in the background. 879 interested in CJK characters may want to customize it to nil.
161 880 You can augment/amend the CJK translation via hash tables
162 --- 881 `ucs-mule-cjk-to-unicode' and `ucs-unicode-to-mule-cjk'. The utf-8
163 ** iso-acc.el is now obsolete. Use one of the latin input methods instead. 882 coding system now also encodes characters from most of Emacs's
164 883 one-dimensional internal charsets, specifically the ISO-8859 ones.
165 --- 884 The utf-16 coding system is affected similarly.
166 ** Language environment and various default coding systems are setup 885
167 more correctly according to the current locale name. If the locale 886 ---
168 name doesn't specify a charset, the default is what glibc defines. 887 ** A new coding system `euc-tw' has been added for traditional Chinese
169 This change may result in using the different coding systems as 888 in CNS encoding; it accepts both Big 5 and CNS as input; on saving,
170 default in some locale (e.g. vi_VN). 889 Big 5 is then converted to CNS.
171 890
172 +++ 891 ---
173 ** The commands copy-file, rename-file, make-symbolic-link and 892 ** Many new coding systems are available by loading the `code-pages'
174 add-name-to-file, when given a directory as the "new name" argument, 893 library. These include complete versions of most of those in
175 convert it to a file name by merging in the within-directory part of 894 codepage.el, based on Unicode mappings. `codepage-setup' is now
176 the existing file's name. (This is the same convention that shell 895 obsolete and is used only in the MS-DOS port of Emacs. windows-1252
177 commands cp, mv, and ln follow.) Thus, M-x copy-file RET ~/foo RET 896 and windows-1251 are preloaded since the former is so common and the
178 /tmp RET copies ~/foo to /tmp/foo. 897 latter is used by GNU locales.
179 898
180 +++ 899 ---
181 ** M-o now is the prefix key for setting text properties; 900 ** New variable `utf-translate-cjk-unicode-range' controls which
182 M-o M-o requests refontification. 901 Unicode characters to translate in `utf-translate-cjk-mode'.
183 902
184 +++ 903 ---
185 ** M-g is now a prefix key. 904 ** iso-10646-1 (`Unicode') fonts can be used to display any range of
186 905 characters encodable by the utf-8 coding system. Just specify the
187 M-g g and M-g M-g run goto-line. 906 fontset appropriately.
188 M-g n and M-g M-n run next-error (like C-x `). 907
189 M-g p and M-g M-p run previous-error. 908 +++
190 909 ** Vertical scrolling is now possible within incremental search.
191 +++ 910 To enable this feature, customize the new user option
192 ** font-lock-lines-before specifies a number of lines before the 911 `isearch-allow-scroll'. User written commands which satisfy stringent
193 current line that should be refontified when you change the buffer. 912 constraints can be marked as "scrolling commands". See the Emacs manual
194 The default value is 1. 913 for details.
195 914
196 +++ 915 +++
197 ** C-u M-x goto-line now switches to the most recent previous buffer, 916 ** C-w in incremental search now grabs either a character or a word,
198 and goes to the specified line in that buffer. 917 making the decision in a heuristic way. This new job is done by the
199 918 command `isearch-yank-word-or-char'. To restore the old behavior,
200 When goto-line starts to execute, if there's a number in the buffer at 919 bind C-w to `isearch-yank-word' in `isearch-mode-map'.
201 point then it acts as the default argument for the minibuffer. 920
202 921 +++
203 --- 922 ** C-y in incremental search now grabs the next line if point is already
204 ** Emacs now responds to mouse-clicks on the mode-line, header-line and 923 at the end of a line.
205 display margin, when run in an xterm. 924
206 925 +++
207 +++ 926 ** C-M-w deletes and C-M-y grabs a character in isearch mode.
208 ** M-SPC (just-one-space) when given a numeric argument N 927 Another method to grab a character is to enter the minibuffer by `M-e'
209 converts whitespace around point to N spaces. 928 and to type `C-f' at the end of the search string in the minibuffer.
210 929
211 +++ 930 +++
212 ** Control characters and escape glyphs are now shown in the new 931 ** M-% typed in isearch mode invokes `query-replace' or
213 escape-glyph face. 932 `query-replace-regexp' (depending on search mode) with the current
214 933 search string used as the string to replace.
215 +++ 934
216 ** Non-breaking space and hyphens are now prefixed with an escape 935 +++
217 character, unless the new user variable `show-nonbreak-escape' is set 936 ** Isearch no longer adds `isearch-resume' commands to the command
218 to nil. 937 history by default. To enable this feature, customize the new
219 938 user option `isearch-resume-in-command-history'.
220 --- 939
221 ** The type-break package now allows `type-break-file-name' to be nil 940 ---
222 and if so, doesn't store any data across sessions. This is handy if 941 ** New user option `query-replace-skip-read-only': when non-nil,
223 you don't want the .type-break file in your home directory or are 942 `query-replace' and related functions simply ignore
224 annoyed by the need for interaction when you kill Emacs. 943 a match if part of it has a read-only property.
225 944
226 --- 945 +++
227 ** display-battery has been replaced by display-battery-mode. 946 ** When used interactively, the commands `query-replace-regexp' and
228 947 `replace-regexp' allow \,expr to be used in a replacement string,
229 --- 948 where expr is an arbitrary Lisp expression evaluated at replacement
230 ** calculator.el now has radix grouping mode, which is available when 949 time. In many cases, this will be more convenient than using
231 `calculator-output-radix' is non-nil. In this mode a separator 950 `query-replace-regexp-eval'. `\#' in a replacement string now refers
232 character is used every few digits, making it easier to see byte 951 to the count of replacements already made by the replacement command.
233 boundries etc. For more info, see the documentation of the variable 952 All regular expression replacement commands now allow `\?' in the
234 `calculator-radix-grouping-mode'. 953 replacement string to specify a position where the replacement string
235 954 can be edited for each replacement.
236 +++ 955
237 ** You can now follow links by clicking Mouse-1 on the link. 956 +++
238 957 ** query-replace uses isearch lazy highlighting when the new user option
239 Traditionally, Emacs uses a Mouse-1 click to set point and a Mouse-2 958 `query-replace-lazy-highlight' is non-nil.
240 click to follow a link, whereas most other applications use a Mouse-1 959
241 click for both purposes, depending on whether you click outside or 960 ---
242 inside a link. Now the behavior of a Mouse-1 click has been changed 961 ** The current match in query-replace is highlighted in new face
243 to match this context-sentitive dual behavior. 962 `query-replace' which by default inherits from isearch face.
244 963
245 Depending on the current mode, a Mouse-2 click in Emacs may do much 964 +++
246 more than just follow a link, so the new Mouse-1 behavior is only 965 ** M-x compare-windows now can automatically skip non-matching text to
247 activated for modes which explicitly mark a clickable text as a "link" 966 resync points in both windows.
248 (see the new function `mouse-on-link-p' for details). The Lisp 967
249 packages that are included in release 22.1 have been adapted to do 968 +++
250 this, but external packages may not yet support this. However, there 969 ** The commands M-x customize-face and M-x customize-face-other-window
251 is no risk in using such packages, as the worst thing that could 970 now look at the character after point. If a face or faces are
252 happen is that you get the original Mouse-1 behavior when you click 971 specified for that character, the commands by default customize those
253 on a link, which typically means that you set point where you click. 972 faces.
254 973
255 If you want to get the original Mouse-1 action also inside a link, you 974 ---
256 just need to press the Mouse-1 button a little longer than a normal 975 ** The face-customization widget has been reworked to be less confusing.
257 click (i.e. press and hold the Mouse-1 button for half a second before 976 In particular, when you enable a face attribute using the corresponding
258 you release it). 977 check-box, there's no longer a redundant `*' option in value selection
259 978 for that attribute; the values you can choose are only those which make
260 Dragging the Mouse-1 inside a link still performs the original 979 sense for the attribute. When an attribute is de-selected by unchecking
261 drag-mouse-1 action, typically copy the text. 980 its check-box, then the (now ignored, but still present temporarily in
262 981 case you re-select the attribute) value is hidden.
263 You can customize the new Mouse-1 behavior via the new user options 982
264 `mouse-1-click-follows-link' and `mouse-1-click-in-non-selected-windows'. 983 +++
265 984 ** When you set or reset a variable's value in a Customize buffer,
266 +++ 985 the previous value becomes the "backup value" of the variable.
267 ** require-final-newline now has two new possible values: 986 You can go back to that backup value by selecting "Use Backup Value"
268 987 under the "[State]" button.
269 `visit' means add a newline (as an undoable change) if it's needed 988
270 when visiting the file. 989 ** Dired mode:
271 990
272 `visit-save' means add a newline (as an undoable change) if it's 991 ---
273 needed when visiting the file, and also add a newline if it's needed 992 *** New faces dired-header, dired-mark, dired-marked, dired-flagged,
274 when saving the file. 993 dired-ignored, dired-directory, dired-symlink, dired-warning
275 994 introduced for Dired mode instead of font-lock faces.
276 +++ 995
277 ** The new option mode-require-final-newline controls how certain 996 +++
278 major modes enable require-final-newline. Any major mode that's 997 *** New Dired command `dired-compare-directories' marks files
279 designed for a kind of file that should normally end in a newline 998 with different file attributes in two dired buffers.
280 sets require-final-newline based on mode-require-final-newline. 999
281 So you can customize mode-require-final-newline to control what these 1000 +++
282 modes do. 1001 *** New Dired command `dired-do-touch' (bound to T) changes timestamps
283 1002 of marked files with the value entered in the minibuffer.
284 +++ 1003
285 ** When the undo information of the current command gets really large 1004 +++
286 (beyond the value of `undo-outer-limit'), Emacs discards it and warns 1005 *** In Dired's ! command (dired-do-shell-command), `*' and `?' now
287 you about it. 1006 control substitution of the file names only when they are surrounded
288 1007 by whitespace. This means you can now use them as shell wildcards
289 +++ 1008 too. If you want to use just plain `*' as a wildcard, type `*""'; the
290 ** line-move-ignore-invisible now defaults to t. 1009 doublequotes make no difference in the shell, but they prevent
1010 special treatment in `dired-do-shell-command'.
1011
1012 +++
1013 *** In Dired, the w command now copies the current line's file name
1014 into the kill ring. With a zero prefix arg, copies absolute file names.
1015
1016 +++
1017 ** The variables dired-free-space-program and dired-free-space-args
1018 have been renamed to directory-free-space-program and
1019 directory-free-space-args, and they now apply whenever Emacs puts a
1020 directory listing into a buffer.
1021
1022 +++
1023 ** Dired-x:
1024
1025 +++
1026 *** Omitting files is now a minor mode, dired-omit-mode. The mode toggling
1027 command is bound to M-o. A new command dired-mark-omitted, bound to * O,
1028 marks omitted files. The variable dired-omit-files-p is obsoleted, use the
1029 mode toggling function instead.
291 1030
292 +++ 1031 +++
293 ** In Outline mode, hide-body no longer hides lines at the top 1032 ** In Outline mode, hide-body no longer hides lines at the top
294 of the file that precede the first header line. 1033 of the file that precede the first header line.
295 1034
296 +++ 1035 +++
297 ** In Enriched mode, `set-left-margin' and `set-right-margin' are now 1036 ** Occur, Info, and comint-derived modes now support using
298 by default bound to `C-c [' and `C-c ]' instead of the former `C-c C-l' 1037 M-x font-lock-mode to toggle fontification. The variable
299 and `C-c C-r'. 1038 `Info-fontify' is no longer applicable; to disable fontification,
300 1039 remove `turn-on-font-lock' from `Info-mode-hook'.
301 +++
302 ** In processing a local variables list, Emacs strips the prefix and
303 suffix are from every line before processing all the lines.
304
305 +++
306 ** `apply-macro-to-region-lines' now operates on all lines that begin
307 in the region, rather than on all complete lines in the region.
308
309 ---
310 ** global-whitespace-mode is a new alias for whitespace-global-mode.
311
312 +++
313 ** There are now two new regular expression operators, \_< and \_>,
314 for matching the beginning and end of a symbol. A symbol is a
315 non-empty sequence of either word or symbol constituent characters, as
316 specified by the syntax table.
317 ---
318 *** rx.el has new corresponding `symbol-end' and `symbol-start' elements.
319
320 +++
321 ** Passing resources on the command line now works on MS Windows.
322 You can use --xrm to pass resource settings to Emacs, overriding any
323 existing values. For example:
324
325 emacs --xrm "Emacs.Background:red" --xrm "Emacs.Geometry:100x20"
326
327 will start up Emacs on an initial frame of 100x20 with red background,
328 irrespective of geometry or background setting on the Windows registry.
329 1040
330 --- 1041 ---
331 ** The terminal emulation code in term.el has been improved, it can 1042 ** The terminal emulation code in term.el has been improved, it can
332 run most curses applications now. 1043 run most curses applications now.
333
334 ** New features in evaluation commands
335
336 +++
337 *** The function `eval-defun' (C-M-x) called on defface reinitializes
338 the face to the value specified in the defface expression.
339
340 +++
341 *** Typing C-x C-e twice prints the value of the integer result
342 in additional formats (octal, hexadecimal, character) specified
343 by the new function `eval-expression-print-format'. The same
344 function also defines the result format for `eval-expression' (M-:),
345 `eval-print-last-sexp' (C-j) and some edebug evaluation functions.
346
347 ---
348 ** New input method chinese-sisheng for inputting Chinese Pinyin
349 characters.
350
351 +++
352 ** New command quail-show-key shows what key (or key sequence) to type
353 in the current input method to input a character at point.
354
355 +++
356 ** You can now switch buffers in a cyclic order with C-x C-left and
357 (prev-buffer) and C-x C-right (next-buffer). C-x left and C-x right
358 can be used as well.
359
360 ---
361 ** Commands winner-redo and winner-undo, from winner.el, are now bound to
362 C-c <left> and C-c <right>, respectively. This is an incompatible change.
363
364 ---
365 ** Help commands `describe-function' and `describe-key' now show function
366 arguments in lowercase italics on displays that support it. To change the
367 default, customize face `help-argument-name' or redefine the function
368 `help-default-arg-highlight'.
369 1044
370 --- 1045 ---
371 ** The comint prompt can now be made read-only, using the new user 1046 ** The comint prompt can now be made read-only, using the new user
372 option `comint-prompt-read-only'. This is not enabled by default, 1047 option `comint-prompt-read-only'. This is not enabled by default,
373 except in IELM buffers. The read-only status of IELM prompts can be 1048 except in IELM buffers. The read-only status of IELM prompts can be
388 not the case, then `comint-kill-region' behaves just like 1063 not the case, then `comint-kill-region' behaves just like
389 `kill-region' if read-only are involved: it copies the text to the 1064 `kill-region' if read-only are involved: it copies the text to the
390 kill-ring, but does not delete it. 1065 kill-ring, but does not delete it.
391 1066
392 +++ 1067 +++
1068 ** The new command `comint-insert-previous-argument' in comint-derived
1069 modes (shell-mode etc) inserts arguments from previous command lines,
1070 like bash's `ESC .' binding. It is bound by default to `C-c .', but
1071 otherwise behaves quite similarly to the bash version.
1072
1073 ** `comint-use-prompt-regexp-instead-of-fields' has been renamed
1074 `comint-use-prompt-regexp'. The old name has been kept as an alias,
1075 but declared obsolete.
1076
1077 +++
1078 ** Telnet now prompts you for a port number with C-u M-x telnet.
1079
1080 ---
1081 ** M-x compile has become more robust and reliable
1082
1083 Quite a few more kinds of messages are recognized. Messages that are
1084 recognized as warnings or informational come in orange or green, instead of
1085 red. Informational messages are by default skipped with `next-error'
1086 (controlled by `compilation-skip-threshold').
1087
1088 Location data is collected on the fly as the *compilation* buffer changes.
1089 This means you could modify messages to make them point to different files.
1090 This also means you can not go to locations of messages you may have deleted.
1091
1092 The variable `compilation-error-regexp-alist' has now become customizable. If
1093 you had added your own regexps to this, you'll probably need to include a
1094 leading `^', otherwise they'll match anywhere on a line. There is now also a
1095 `compilation-mode-font-lock-keywords' and it nicely handles all the checks
1096 that configure outputs and -o options so you see at a glance where you are.
1097
1098 The new file etc/compilation.txt gives examples of each type of message.
1099
1100 ** Compilation mode enhancements:
1101
1102 +++
1103 *** New user option `compilation-environment'.
1104 This option allows you to specify environment variables for inferior
1105 compilation processes without affecting the environment that all
1106 subprocesses inherit.
1107
1108 +++
1109 ** Grep has been decoupled from compilation mode setup.
1110
1111 ---
1112 *** There's a new separate package grep.el.
1113
1114 ---
1115 *** M-x grep has been adapted to new compile
1116
1117 Hits are fontified in green, and hits in binary files in orange. Grep buffers
1118 can be saved and automatically revisited with the new Grep mode.
1119
1120 ---
1121 *** Grep commands now have their own submenu and customization group.
1122
1123 +++
1124 *** `grep-find' is now also available under the name `find-grep' where
1125 people knowing `find-grep-dired' would probably expect it.
1126
1127 ---
1128 *** The new variables `grep-window-height', `grep-auto-highlight', and
1129 `grep-scroll-output' can be used to override the corresponding
1130 compilation mode settings for grep commands.
1131
1132 +++
1133 *** New option `grep-highlight-matches' highlightes matches in *grep*
1134 buffer. It uses a special feature of some grep programs which accept
1135 --color option to output markers around matches. When going to the next
1136 match with `next-error' the exact match is highlighted in the source
1137 buffer. Otherwise, if `grep-highlight-matches' is nil, the whole
1138 source line is highlighted.
1139
1140 +++
1141 *** New key bindings in grep output window:
1142 SPC and DEL scrolls window up and down. C-n and C-p moves to next and
1143 previous match in the grep window. RET jumps to the source line of
1144 the current match. `n' and `p' shows next and previous match in
1145 other window, but does not switch buffer. `{' and `}' jumps to the
1146 previous or next file in the grep output. TAB also jumps to the next
1147 file.
1148
1149 +++
1150 ** M-x grep now tries to avoid appending `/dev/null' to the command line
1151 by using GNU grep `-H' option instead. M-x grep automatically
1152 detects whether this is possible or not the first time it is invoked.
1153 When `-H' is used, the grep command line supplied by the user is passed
1154 unchanged to the system to execute, which allows more complicated
1155 command lines to be used than was possible before.
1156
1157 +++
1158 ** New options `next-error-highlight' and `next-error-highlight-no-select'
1159 specify the method of highlighting of the corresponding source line
1160 in new face `next-error'.
1161
1162 +++
1163 ** A new minor mode `next-error-follow-minor-mode' can be used in
1164 compilation-mode, grep-mode, occur-mode, and diff-mode (i.e. all the
1165 modes that can use `next-error'). In this mode, cursor motion in the
1166 buffer causes automatic display in another window of the corresponding
1167 matches, compilation errors, etc. This minor mode can be toggled with
1168 C-c C-f.
1169
1170 +++
1171 ** M-x diff uses diff-mode instead of compilation-mode.
1172
1173 +++
1174 ** In the *Occur* buffer, `o' switches to it in another window, and
1175 C-o displays the current line's occurrence in another window without
1176 switching to it.
1177
1178 +++
393 ** You can now use next-error (C-x `) and previous-error to advance to 1179 ** You can now use next-error (C-x `) and previous-error to advance to
394 the next/previous matching line found by M-x occur. 1180 the next/previous matching line found by M-x occur.
395 1181
396 +++ 1182 +++
397 ** Telnet now prompts you for a port number with C-u M-x telnet. 1183 ** The new command `multi-occur' is just like `occur', except it can
398 1184 search multiple buffers. There is also a new command
399 +++ 1185 `multi-occur-by-filename-regexp' which allows you to specify the
400 ** New command line option -Q or --quick. 1186 buffers to search by their filename. Internally, Occur mode has been
401 1187 rewritten, and now uses font-lock, among other changes.
402 This is like using -q --no-site-file, but in addition it also disables 1188
403 the fancy startup screen. 1189 +++
404 1190 ** font-lock: in modes like C and Lisp where the fontification assumes that
405 +++ 1191 an open-paren in column 0 is always outside of any string or comment,
406 ** New command line option -D or --basic-display. 1192 font-lock now highlights any such open-paren-in-column-zero in bold-red
407 1193 if it is inside a string or a comment, to indicate that it can cause
408 Disables the menu-bar, the tool-bar, the scroll-bars, tool tips, and 1194 trouble with fontification and/or indentation.
409 the blinking cursor. 1195
410 1196 ** Enhancements to apropos commands:
411 +++ 1197
412 ** New command line option -nbc or --no-blinking-cursor disables 1198 +++
413 the blinking cursor on graphical terminals. 1199 *** The apropos commands now accept a list of words to match.
414 1200 When more than one word is specified, at least two of those words must
415 +++ 1201 be present for an item to match. Regular expression matching is still
416 ** C-h v and C-h f commands now include a hyperlink to the C source for 1202 available.
417 variables and functions defined in C (if the C source is available). 1203
418 1204 +++
419 --- 1205 *** The new option `apropos-sort-by-scores' causes the matching items
420 ** When used interactively, `format-write-file' now asks for confirmation 1206 to be sorted according to their score. The score for an item is a
421 before overwriting an existing file, unless a prefix argument is 1207 number calculated to indicate how well the item matches the words or
422 supplied. This behavior is analogous to `write-file'. 1208 regular expression that you entered to the apropos command. The best
1209 match is listed first, and the calculated score is shown for each
1210 matching item.
1211
1212 +++
1213 ** You can have several Emacs servers on the same machine.
1214
1215 % emacs --eval '(setq server-name "foo")' -f server-start &
1216 % emacs --eval '(setq server-name "bar")' -f server-start &
1217 % emacsclient -s foo file1
1218 % emacsclient -s bar file2
1219
1220 +++
1221 ** The `emacsclient' command understands the options `--eval' and
1222 `--display' which tell Emacs respectively to evaluate the given elisp
1223 expression and to use the given display when visiting files.
1224
1225 +++
1226 ** User option `server-mode' can be used to start a server process.
1227
1228 +++
1229 ** New user option `add-log-always-start-new-record'.
1230 When this option is enabled, M-x add-change-log-entry always
1231 starts a new record regardless of when the last record is.
1232
1233 ** Info mode:
1234
1235 +++
1236 *** A numeric prefix argument of `info' selects an Info buffer
1237 with the number appended to the *info* buffer name (e.g. "*info*<2>").
1238
1239 ---
1240 *** isearch in Info uses Info-search and searches through multiple nodes.
1241 Before leaving the initial Info node isearch fails once with the error
1242 message [initial node], and with subsequent C-s/C-r continues through
1243 other nodes. When isearch fails for the rest of the manual, it wraps
1244 aroung the whole manual to the top/final node. The user option
1245 `Info-isearch-search' controls whether to use Info-search for isearch,
1246 or the default isearch search function that wraps around the current
1247 Info node.
1248
1249 *** New search commands: `Info-search-case-sensitively' (bound to S),
1250 `Info-search-backward', and `Info-search-next' which repeats the last
1251 search without prompting for a new search string.
1252
1253 *** New command `Info-history-forward' (bound to r and new toolbar icon)
1254 moves forward in history to the node you returned from after using
1255 `Info-history-back' (renamed from `Info-last').
1256
1257 *** New command `Info-history' (bound to L) displays a menu of visited nodes.
1258
1259 *** New command `Info-toc' (bound to T) creates a node with table of contents
1260 from the tree structure of menus of the current Info file.
1261
1262 *** New command `info-apropos' searches the indices of the known
1263 Info files on your system for a string, and builds a menu of the
1264 possible matches.
1265
1266 *** New command `Info-copy-current-node-name' (bound to w) copies
1267 the current Info node name into the kill ring. With a zero prefix
1268 arg, puts the node name inside the `info' function call.
1269
1270 ---
1271 *** New face `info-xref-visited' distinguishes visited nodes from unvisited
1272 and a new option `Info-fontify-visited-nodes' to control this.
1273
1274 *** http and ftp links in Info are now operational: they look like cross
1275 references and following them calls `browse-url'.
1276
1277 +++
1278 *** Info now hides node names in menus and cross references by default.
1279 If you prefer the old behavior, you can set the new user option
1280 `Info-hide-note-references' to nil.
1281
1282 ---
1283 *** Images in Info pages are supported.
1284 Info pages show embedded images, in Emacs frames with image support.
1285 Info documentation that includes images, processed with makeinfo
1286 version 4.7 or newer, compiles to Info pages with embedded images.
1287
1288 +++
1289 *** The default value for `Info-scroll-prefer-subnodes' is now nil.
1290
1291 ---
1292 *** Info-index offers completion.
1293
1294 ---
1295 ** Lisp mode now uses font-lock-doc-face for the docstrings.
1296
1297 +++
1298 ** A prefix argument of C-M-q in Emacs Lisp mode pretty-printifies the
1299 list starting after point.
1300
1301 ** New features in evaluation commands
1302
1303 +++
1304 *** The function `eval-defun' (C-M-x) called on defface reinitializes
1305 the face to the value specified in the defface expression.
1306
1307 +++
1308 *** Typing C-x C-e twice prints the value of the integer result
1309 in additional formats (octal, hexadecimal, character) specified
1310 by the new function `eval-expression-print-format'. The same
1311 function also defines the result format for `eval-expression' (M-:),
1312 `eval-print-last-sexp' (C-j) and some edebug evaluation functions.
1313
1314 +++
1315 ** CC Mode changes.
1316
1317 *** Font lock support.
1318 CC Mode now provides font lock support for all its languages. This
1319 supersedes the font lock patterns that have been in the core font lock
1320 package for C, C++, Java and Objective-C. Like indentation, font
1321 locking is done in a uniform way across all languages (except the new
1322 AWK mode - see below). That means that the new font locking will be
1323 different from the old patterns in various details for most languages.
1324
1325 The main goal of the font locking in CC Mode is accuracy, to provide a
1326 dependable aid in recognizing the various constructs. Some, like
1327 strings and comments, are easy to recognize while others like
1328 declarations and types can be very tricky. CC Mode can go to great
1329 lengths to recognize declarations and casts correctly, especially when
1330 the types aren't recognized by standard patterns. This is a fairly
1331 demanding analysis which can be slow on older hardware, and it can
1332 therefore be disabled by choosing a lower decoration level with the
1333 variable font-lock-maximum-decoration.
1334
1335 Note that the most demanding font lock level has been tuned with lazy
1336 fontification in mind, i.e. there should be a support mode that waits
1337 with the fontification until the text is actually shown
1338 (e.g. Just-in-time Lock mode, which is the default, or Lazy Lock
1339 mode). Fontifying a file with several thousand lines in one go can
1340 take the better part of a minute.
1341
1342 **** The (c|c++|objc|java|idl|pike)-font-lock-extra-types variables
1343 are now used by CC Mode to recognize identifiers that are certain to
1344 be types. (They are also used in cases that aren't related to font
1345 locking.) At the maximum decoration level, types are often recognized
1346 properly anyway, so these variables should be fairly restrictive and
1347 not contain patterns for uncertain types.
1348
1349 **** Support for documentation comments.
1350 There is a "plugin" system to fontify documentation comments like
1351 Javadoc and the markup within them. It's independent of the host
1352 language, so it's possible to e.g. turn on Javadoc font locking in C
1353 buffers. See the variable c-doc-comment-style for details.
1354
1355 Currently two kinds of doc comment styles are recognized: Suns Javadoc
1356 and Autodoc which is used in Pike. This is by no means a complete
1357 list of the most common tools; if your doc comment extractor of choice
1358 is missing then please drop a note to bug-cc-mode@gnu.org.
1359
1360 **** Better handling of C++ templates.
1361 As a side effect of the more accurate font locking, C++ templates are
1362 now handled much better. The angle brackets that delimit them are
1363 given parenthesis syntax so that they can be navigated like other
1364 parens.
1365
1366 This also improves indentation of templates, although there still is
1367 work to be done in that area. E.g. it's required that multiline
1368 template clauses are written in full and then refontified to be
1369 recognized, and the indentation of nested templates is a bit odd and
1370 not as configurable as it ought to be.
1371
1372 **** Improved handling of Objective-C and CORBA IDL.
1373 Especially the support for Objective-C and IDL has gotten an overhaul.
1374 The special "@" declarations in Objective-C are handled correctly.
1375 All the keywords used in CORBA IDL, PSDL, and CIDL are recognized and
1376 handled correctly, also wrt indentation.
1377
1378 *** Support for the AWK language.
1379 Support for the AWK language has been introduced. The implementation is
1380 based around GNU AWK version 3.1, but it should work pretty well with
1381 any AWK. As yet, not all features of CC Mode have been adapted for AWK.
1382 Here is a summary:
1383
1384 **** Indentation Engine
1385 The CC Mode indentation engine fully supports AWK mode.
1386
1387 AWK mode handles code formatted in the conventional AWK fashion: `{'s
1388 which start actions, user-defined functions, or compound statements are
1389 placed on the same line as the associated construct; the matching `}'s
1390 are normally placed under the start of the respective pattern, function
1391 definition, or structured statement.
1392
1393 The predefined indentation functions haven't yet been adapted for AWK
1394 mode, though some of them may work serendipitously. There shouldn't be
1395 any problems writing custom indentation functions for AWK mode.
1396
1397 The command C-c C-q (c-indent-defun) hasn't yet been adapted for AWK,
1398 though in practice it works properly nearly all the time. Should it
1399 fail, explicitly set the region around the function (using C-u C-SPC:
1400 C-M-h probably won't work either) then do C-M-\ (indent-region).
1401
1402 **** Font Locking
1403 There is a single level of font locking in AWK mode, rather than the
1404 three distinct levels the other modes have. There are several
1405 idiosyncrasies in AWK mode's font-locking due to the peculiarities of
1406 the AWK language itself.
1407
1408 **** Comment Commands
1409 M-; (indent-for-comment) works fine. None of the other CC Mode
1410 comment formatting commands have yet been adapted for AWK mode.
1411
1412 **** Movement Commands
1413 Most of the movement commands work in AWK mode. The most important
1414 exceptions are M-a (c-beginning-of-statement) and M-e
1415 (c-end-of-statement) which haven't yet been adapted.
1416
1417 The notion of "defun" has been augmented to include AWK pattern-action
1418 pairs. C-M-a (c-awk-beginning-of-defun) and C-M-e (c-awk-end-of-defun)
1419 recognise these pattern-action pairs, as well as user defined
1420 functions.
1421
1422 **** Auto-newline Insertion and Clean-ups
1423 Auto-newline insertion hasn't yet been adapted for AWK. Some of
1424 the clean-ups can actually convert good AWK code into syntactically
1425 invalid code. These features are best disabled in AWK buffers.
1426
1427 *** New syntactic symbols in IDL mode.
1428 The top level constructs "module" and "composition" (from CIDL) are
1429 now handled like "namespace" in C++: They are given syntactic symbols
1430 module-open, module-close, inmodule, composition-open,
1431 composition-close, and incomposition.
1432
1433 *** New functions to do hungry delete without enabling hungry delete mode.
1434 The functions c-hungry-backspace and c-hungry-delete-forward can be
1435 bound to keys to get this feature without toggling a mode.
1436 Contributed by Kevin Ryde.
1437
1438 *** Better control over require-final-newline. The variable that
1439 controls how to handle a final newline when the buffer is saved,
1440 require-final-newline, is now customizable on a per-mode basis through
1441 c-require-final-newline. That is a list of modes, and only those
1442 modes set require-final-newline. By default that's C, C++ and
1443 Objective-C.
1444
1445 The specified modes set require-final-newline based on
1446 mode-require-final-newline, as usual.
1447
1448 *** Format change for syntactic context elements.
1449 The elements in the syntactic context returned by c-guess-basic-syntax
1450 and stored in c-syntactic-context has been changed somewhat to allow
1451 attaching more information. They are now lists instead of single cons
1452 cells. E.g. a line that previously had the syntactic analysis
1453
1454 ((inclass . 11) (topmost-intro . 13))
1455
1456 is now analysed as
1457
1458 ((inclass 11) (topmost-intro 13))
1459
1460 In some cases there are more than one position given for a syntactic
1461 symbol.
1462
1463 This change might affect code that call c-guess-basic-syntax directly,
1464 and custom lineup functions if they use c-syntactic-context. However,
1465 the argument given to lineup functions is still a single cons cell
1466 with nil or an integer in the cdr.
1467
1468 *** API changes for derived modes.
1469 There have been extensive changes "under the hood" which can affect
1470 derived mode writers. Some of these changes are likely to cause
1471 incompatibilities with existing derived modes, but on the other hand
1472 care has now been taken to make it possible to extend and modify CC
1473 Mode with less risk of such problems in the future.
1474
1475 **** New language variable system.
1476 See the comment blurb near the top of cc-langs.el.
1477
1478 **** New initialization functions.
1479 The initialization procedure has been split up into more functions to
1480 give better control: c-basic-common-init, c-font-lock-init, and
1481 c-init-language-vars.
1482
1483 *** Changes in analysis of nested syntactic constructs.
1484 The syntactic analysis engine has better handling of cases where
1485 several syntactic constructs appear nested on the same line. They are
1486 now handled as if each construct started on a line of its own.
1487
1488 This means that CC Mode now indents some cases differently, and
1489 although it's more consistent there might be cases where the old way
1490 gave results that's more to one's liking. So if you find a situation
1491 where you think that the indentation has become worse, please report
1492 it to bug-cc-mode@gnu.org.
1493
1494 **** New syntactic symbol substatement-label.
1495 This symbol is used when a label is inserted between a statement and
1496 its substatement. E.g:
1497
1498 if (x)
1499 x_is_true:
1500 do_stuff();
1501
1502 *** Better handling of multiline macros.
1503
1504 **** Syntactic indentation inside macros.
1505 The contents of multiline #define's are now analyzed and indented
1506 syntactically just like other code. This can be disabled by the new
1507 variable c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros. A new syntactic symbol
1508 cpp-define-intro has been added to control the initial indentation
1509 inside #define's.
1510
1511 **** New lineup function c-lineup-cpp-define.
1512 Now used by default to line up macro continuation lines. The behavior
1513 of this function closely mimics the indentation one gets if the macro
1514 is indented while the line continuation backslashes are temporarily
1515 removed. If syntactic indentation in macros is turned off, it works
1516 much line c-lineup-dont-change, which was used earlier, but handles
1517 empty lines within the macro better.
1518
1519 **** Automatically inserted newlines continues the macro if used within one.
1520 This applies to the newlines inserted by the auto-newline mode, and to
1521 c-context-line-break and c-context-open-line.
1522
1523 **** Better alignment of line continuation backslashes.
1524 c-backslash-region tries to adapt to surrounding backslashes. New
1525 variable c-backslash-max-column which put a limit on how far out
1526 backslashes can be moved.
1527
1528 **** Automatic alignment of line continuation backslashes.
1529 This is controlled by the new variable c-auto-align-backslashes. It
1530 affects c-context-line-break, c-context-open-line and newlines
1531 inserted in auto-newline mode.
1532
1533 **** Line indentation works better inside macros.
1534 Regardless whether syntactic indentation and syntactic indentation
1535 inside macros are enabled or not, line indentation now ignores the
1536 line continuation backslashes. This is most noticeable when syntactic
1537 indentation is turned off and there are empty lines (save for the
1538 backslash) in the macro.
1539
1540 *** indent-for-comment is more customizable.
1541 The behavior of M-; (indent-for-comment) is now configurable through
1542 the variable c-indent-comment-alist. The indentation behavior based
1543 on the preceding code on the line, e.g. to get two spaces after #else
1544 and #endif but indentation to comment-column in most other cases
1545 (something which was hardcoded earlier).
1546
1547 *** New function c-context-open-line.
1548 It's the open-line equivalent of c-context-line-break.
1549
1550 *** New lineup functions
1551
1552 **** c-lineup-string-cont
1553 This lineup function lines up a continued string under the one it
1554 continues. E.g:
1555
1556 result = prefix + "A message "
1557 "string."; <- c-lineup-string-cont
1558
1559 **** c-lineup-cascaded-calls
1560 Lines up series of calls separated by "->" or ".".
1561
1562 **** c-lineup-knr-region-comment
1563 Gives (what most people think is) better indentation of comments in
1564 the "K&R region" between the function header and its body.
1565
1566 **** c-lineup-gcc-asm-reg
1567 Provides better indentation inside asm blocks. Contributed by Kevin
1568 Ryde.
1569
1570 **** c-lineup-argcont
1571 Lines up continued function arguments after the preceding comma.
1572 Contributed by Kevin Ryde.
1573
1574 *** Better caching of the syntactic context.
1575 CC Mode caches the positions of the opening parentheses (of any kind)
1576 of the lists surrounding the point. Those positions are used in many
1577 places as anchor points for various searches. The cache is now
1578 improved so that it can be reused to a large extent when the point is
1579 moved. The less it moves, the less needs to be recalculated.
1580
1581 The effect is that CC Mode should be fast most of the time even when
1582 opening parens are hung (i.e. aren't in column zero). It's typically
1583 only the first time after the point is moved far down in a complex
1584 file that it'll take noticeable time to find out the syntactic
1585 context.
1586
1587 *** Statements are recognized in a more robust way.
1588 Statements are recognized most of the time even when they occur in an
1589 "invalid" context, e.g. in a function argument. In practice that can
1590 happen when macros are involved.
1591
1592 *** Improved the way c-indent-exp chooses the block to indent.
1593 It now indents the block for the closest sexp following the point
1594 whose closing paren ends on a different line. This means that the
1595 point doesn't have to be immediately before the block to indent.
1596 Also, only the block and the closing line is indented; the current
1597 line is left untouched.
1598
1599 *** Added toggle for syntactic indentation.
1600 The function c-toggle-syntactic-indentation can be used to toggle
1601 syntactic indentation.
1602
1603 ---
1604 ** Perl mode has a new variable `perl-indent-continued-arguments'.
1605
1606 ---
1607 ** Fortran mode does more font-locking by default. Use level 3
1608 highlighting for the old default.
1609
1610 +++
1611 ** Fortran mode has a new variable `fortran-directive-re'.
1612 Adapt this to match the format of any compiler directives you use.
1613 Lines that match are never indented, and are given distinctive font-locking.
1614
1615 +++
1616 ** F90 mode and Fortran mode have new navigation commands
1617 `f90-end-of-block', `f90-beginning-of-block', `f90-next-block',
1618 `f90-previous-block', `fortran-end-of-block',
1619 `fortran-beginning-of-block'.
1620
1621 ---
1622 ** F90 mode and Fortran mode have support for hs-minor-mode (hideshow).
1623 It cannot deal with every code format, but ought to handle a sizeable
1624 majority.
1625
1626 ---
1627 ** The new function `f90-backslash-not-special' can be used to change
1628 the syntax of backslashes in F90 buffers.
1629
1630 ---
1631 ** Prolog mode has a new variable `prolog-font-lock-keywords'
1632 to support use of font-lock.
1633
1634 ---
1635 ** Emacs now tries to set up buffer coding systems for HTML/XML files
1636 automatically.
1637
1638 +++
1639 ** SGML mode has indentation and supports XML syntax.
1640 The new variable `sgml-xml-mode' tells SGML mode to use XML syntax.
1641 When this option is enabled, SGML tags are inserted in XML style,
1642 i.e., there is always a closing tag.
1643 By default, its setting is inferred on a buffer-by-buffer basis
1644 from the file name or buffer contents.
1645
1646 +++
1647 ** `xml-mode' is now an alias for `sgml-mode', which has XML support.
1648
1649 ** TeX modes:
1650
1651 +++
1652 *** C-c C-c prompts for a command to run, and tries to offer a good default.
1653
1654 +++
1655 *** The user option `tex-start-options-string' has been replaced
1656 by two new user options: `tex-start-options', which should hold
1657 command-line options to feed to TeX, and `tex-start-commands' which should hold
1658 TeX commands to use at startup.
1659
1660 ---
1661 *** verbatim environments are now highlighted in courier by font-lock
1662 and super/sub-scripts are made into super/sub-scripts.
1663
1664 +++
1665 *** New major mode doctex-mode for *.dtx files.
1666
1667 ** BibTeX mode:
1668 *** The new command bibtex-url browses a URL for the BibTeX entry at
1669 point (bound to C-c C-l and mouse-2, RET on clickable fields).
1670
1671 *** The new command bibtex-entry-update (bound to C-c C-u) updates
1672 an existing BibTeX entry.
1673
1674 *** New `bibtex-entry-format' option `required-fields', enabled by default.
1675
1676 *** bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries can take values `plain',
1677 `crossref', and `entry-class' which control the sorting scheme used
1678 for BibTeX entries. `bibtex-sort-entry-class' controls the sorting
1679 scheme `entry-class'. TAB completion for reference keys and
1680 automatic detection of duplicates does not require anymore that
1681 bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is non-nil.
1682
1683 *** If the new variable bibtex-parse-keys-fast is non-nil,
1684 use fast but simplified algorithm for parsing BibTeX keys.
1685
1686 *** If the new variable bibtex-autoadd-commas is non-nil,
1687 automatically add missing commas at end of BibTeX fields.
1688
1689 *** The new variable bibtex-autofill-types contains a list of entry
1690 types for which fields are filled automatically (if possible).
1691
1692 *** The new command bibtex-complete completes word fragment before
1693 point according to context (bound to M-tab).
1694
1695 *** The new commands bibtex-find-entry and bibtex-find-crossref
1696 locate entries and crossref'd entries (bound to C-c C-s and C-c C-x).
1697 Crossref fields are clickable (bound to mouse-2, RET).
1698
1699 *** In BibTeX mode the command fill-paragraph (bound to M-q) fills
1700 individual fields of a BibTeX entry.
1701
1702 *** The new variables bibtex-files and bibtex-file-path define a set
1703 of BibTeX files that are searched for entry keys.
1704
1705 *** The new command bibtex-validate-globally checks for duplicate keys
1706 in multiple BibTeX files.
1707
1708 *** The new command bibtex-copy-summary-as-kill pushes summary
1709 of BibTeX entry to kill ring (bound to C-c C-t).
1710
1711 +++
1712 ** In Enriched mode, `set-left-margin' and `set-right-margin' are now
1713 by default bound to `C-c [' and `C-c ]' instead of the former `C-c C-l'
1714 and `C-c C-r'.
1715
1716 +++
1717 ** In GUD mode, when talking to GDB, C-x C-a C-j "jumps" the program
1718 counter to the specified source line (the one where point is).
1719
1720 ---
1721 ** GUD mode has its own tool bar for controlling execution of the inferior
1722 and other common debugger commands.
1723
1724 ---
1725 ** GUD mode improvements for jdb:
1726
1727 *** Search for source files using jdb classpath and class
1728 information. Fast startup since there is no need to scan all
1729 source files up front. There is also no need to create and maintain
1730 lists of source directories to scan. Look at `gud-jdb-use-classpath'
1731 and `gud-jdb-classpath' customization variables documentation.
1732
1733 *** Supports the standard breakpoint (gud-break, gud-clear)
1734 set/clear operations from java source files under the classpath, stack
1735 traversal (gud-up, gud-down), and run until current stack finish
1736 (gud-finish).
1737
1738 *** Supports new jdb (Java 1.2 and later) in addition to oldjdb
1739 (Java 1.1 jdb).
1740
1741 *** The previous method of searching for source files has been
1742 preserved in case someone still wants/needs to use it.
1743 Set gud-jdb-use-classpath to nil.
1744
1745 Added Customization Variables
1746
1747 *** gud-jdb-command-name. What command line to use to invoke jdb.
1748
1749 *** gud-jdb-use-classpath. Allows selection of java source file searching
1750 method: set to t for new method, nil to scan gud-jdb-directories for
1751 java sources (previous method).
1752
1753 *** gud-jdb-directories. List of directories to scan and search for java
1754 classes using the original gud-jdb method (if gud-jdb-use-classpath
1755 is nil).
1756
1757 Minor Improvements
1758
1759 *** The STARTTLS elisp wrapper (starttls.el) can now use GNUTLS
1760 instead of the OpenSSL based "starttls" tool. For backwards
1761 compatibility, it prefers "starttls", but you can toggle
1762 `starttls-use-gnutls' to switch to GNUTLS (or simply remove the
1763 "starttls" tool).
1764
1765 *** Do not allow debugger output history variable to grow without bounds.
423 1766
424 +++ 1767 +++
425 ** You can now use Auto Revert mode to `tail' a file. 1768 ** You can now use Auto Revert mode to `tail' a file.
426 If point is at the end of a file buffer before reverting, Auto Revert 1769 If point is at the end of a file buffer before reverting, Auto Revert
427 mode keeps it at the end after reverting. Similarly if point is 1770 mode keeps it at the end after reverting. Similarly if point is
452 Revert mode reliably updates version control info (such as the version 1795 Revert mode reliably updates version control info (such as the version
453 control number in the mode line), in all version controlled buffers in 1796 control number in the mode line), in all version controlled buffers in
454 which it is active. If the option is nil, the default, then this info 1797 which it is active. If the option is nil, the default, then this info
455 only gets updated whenever the buffer gets reverted. 1798 only gets updated whenever the buffer gets reverted.
456 1799
457 +++ 1800 ---
458 ** New command `Buffer-menu-toggle-files-only' toggles display of file 1801 ** recentf changes.
459 buffers only in the Buffer Menu. It is bound to `T' in Buffer Menu 1802
460 mode. 1803 The recent file list is now automatically cleanup when recentf mode is
461 1804 enabled. The new option `recentf-auto-cleanup' controls when to do
462 --- 1805 automatic cleanup.
463 ** M-x compile has become more robust and reliable 1806
464 1807 The `recentf-keep' option replaces `recentf-keep-non-readable-files-p'
465 Quite a few more kinds of messages are recognized. Messages that are 1808 and provides a more general mechanism to customize which file names to
466 recognized as warnings or informational come in orange or green, instead of 1809 keep in the recent list.
467 red. Informational messages are by default skipped with `next-error' 1810
468 (controlled by `compilation-skip-threshold'). 1811 With the more advanced option: `recentf-filename-handler', you can
469 1812 specify a function that transforms filenames handled by recentf. For
470 Location data is collected on the fly as the *compilation* buffer changes. 1813 example, if set to `file-truename', the same file will not be in the
471 This means you could modify messages to make them point to different files. 1814 recent list with different symbolic links.
472 This also means you can not go to locations of messages you may have deleted. 1815
473 1816 To follow naming convention, `recentf-menu-append-commands-flag'
474 The variable `compilation-error-regexp-alist' has now become customizable. If 1817 replaces the misnamed option `recentf-menu-append-commands-p'. The
475 you had added your own regexps to this, you'll probably need to include a 1818 old name remains available as alias, but has been marked obsolete.
476 leading `^', otherwise they'll match anywhere on a line. There is now also a
477 `compilation-mode-font-lock-keywords' and it nicely handles all the checks
478 that configure outputs and -o options so you see at a glance where you are.
479
480 The new file etc/compilation.txt gives examples of each type of message.
481
482 ** Compilation mode enhancements:
483
484 +++
485 *** New user option `compilation-environment'.
486 This option allows you to specify environment variables for inferior
487 compilation processes without affecting the environment that all
488 subprocesses inherit.
489
490 +++
491 ** Grep has been decoupled from compilation mode setup.
492
493 ---
494 *** There's a new separate package grep.el.
495
496 ---
497 *** M-x grep has been adapted to new compile
498
499 Hits are fontified in green, and hits in binary files in orange. Grep buffers
500 can be saved and automatically revisited with the new Grep mode.
501
502 ---
503 *** Grep commands now have their own submenu and customization group.
504
505 +++
506 *** `grep-find' is now also available under the name `find-grep' where
507 people knowing `find-grep-dired' would probably expect it.
508
509 ---
510 *** The new variables `grep-window-height', `grep-auto-highlight', and
511 `grep-scroll-output' can be used to override the corresponding
512 compilation mode settings for grep commands.
513
514 +++
515 *** New option `grep-highlight-matches' highlightes matches in *grep*
516 buffer. It uses a special feature of some grep programs which accept
517 --color option to output markers around matches. When going to the next
518 match with `next-error' the exact match is highlighted in the source
519 buffer. Otherwise, if `grep-highlight-matches' is nil, the whole
520 source line is highlighted.
521
522 +++
523 *** New key bindings in grep output window:
524 SPC and DEL scrolls window up and down. C-n and C-p moves to next and
525 previous match in the grep window. RET jumps to the source line of
526 the current match. `n' and `p' shows next and previous match in
527 other window, but does not switch buffer. `{' and `}' jumps to the
528 previous or next file in the grep output. TAB also jumps to the next
529 file.
530
531 +++
532 ** New options `next-error-highlight' and `next-error-highlight-no-select'
533 specify the method of highlighting of the corresponding source line
534 in new face `next-error'.
535
536 +++
537 ** A new minor mode `next-error-follow-minor-mode' can be used in
538 compilation-mode, grep-mode, occur-mode, and diff-mode (i.e. all the
539 modes that can use `next-error'). In this mode, cursor motion in the
540 buffer causes automatic display in another window of the corresponding
541 matches, compilation errors, etc. This minor mode can be toggled with
542 C-c C-f.
543
544 +++
545 ** M-x diff uses diff-mode instead of compilation-mode.
546
547 +++
548 ** M-x compare-windows now can automatically skip non-matching text to
549 resync points in both windows.
550
551 ---
552 ** New command `strokes-global-set-stroke-string'.
553 This is like `strokes-global-set-stroke', but it allows you to bind
554 the stroke directly to a string to insert. This is convenient for
555 using strokes as an input method.
556
557 ** Gnus package
558
559 ---
560 *** Gnus now includes Sieve and PGG
561 Sieve is a library for managing Sieve scripts. PGG is a library to handle
562 PGP/MIME.
563
564 ---
565 *** There are many news features, bug fixes and improvements.
566 See the file GNUS-NEWS or the node "Oort Gnus" in the Gnus manual for details.
567 1819
568 +++ 1820 +++
569 ** Desktop package 1821 ** Desktop package
570 1822
571 +++ 1823 +++
620 Customize the new option `save-place-forget-unreadable-files' to nil 1872 Customize the new option `save-place-forget-unreadable-files' to nil
621 to get the old behavior. The new options `save-place-save-skipped' 1873 to get the old behavior. The new options `save-place-save-skipped'
622 and `save-place-skip-check-regexp' allow further fine-tuning of this 1874 and `save-place-skip-check-regexp' allow further fine-tuning of this
623 feature. 1875 feature.
624 1876
625 +++ 1877 ** EDiff changes.
626 ** You can have several Emacs servers on the same machine. 1878
627 1879 +++
628 % emacs --eval '(setq server-name "foo")' -f server-start & 1880 *** When comparing directories.
629 % emacs --eval '(setq server-name "bar")' -f server-start & 1881 Typing D brings up a buffer that lists the differences between the contents of
630 % emacsclient -s foo file1 1882 directories. Now it is possible to use this buffer to copy the missing files
631 % emacsclient -s bar file2 1883 from one directory to another.
632 1884
633 +++ 1885 +++
634 ** On window systems, lines which are exactly as wide as the window 1886 *** When comparing files or buffers.
635 (not counting the final newline character) are no longer broken into 1887 Typing the = key now offers to perform the word-by-word comparison of the
636 two lines on the display (with just the newline on the second line). 1888 currently highlighted regions in an inferior Ediff session. If you answer 'n'
637 Instead, the newline now "overflows" into the right fringe, and the 1889 then it reverts to the old behavior and asks the user to select regions for
638 cursor will be displayed in the fringe when positioned on that newline. 1890 comparison.
639 1891
640 The new user option 'overflow-newline-into-fringe' may be set to nil to 1892 *** The new command `ediff-backup' compares a file with its most recent
641 revert to the old behavior of continuing such lines. 1893 backup using `ediff'. If you specify the name of a backup file,
642 1894 `ediff-backup' compares it with the file of which it is a backup.
643 +++ 1895
644 ** The buffer boundaries (i.e. first and last line in the buffer) may 1896 +++
645 now be marked with angle bitmaps in the fringes. In addition, up and 1897 ** Etags changes.
646 down arrow bitmaps may be shown at the top and bottom of the left or 1898
647 right fringe if the window can be scrolled in either direction. 1899 *** New regular expressions features
648 1900
649 This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable 1901 **** New syntax for regular expressions, multi-line regular expressions.
650 `indicate-buffer-boundaries' to a non-nil value. The default value of 1902 The syntax --ignore-case-regexp=/regex/ is now undocumented and retained
651 this variable is found in `default-indicate-buffer-boundaries'. 1903 only for backward compatibility. The new equivalent syntax is
652 1904 --regex=/regex/i. More generally, it is --regex=/TAGREGEX/TAGNAME/MODS,
653 If value is `left' or `right', both angle and arrow bitmaps are 1905 where `/TAGNAME' is optional, as usual, and MODS is a string of 0 or
654 displayed in the left or right fringe, resp. 1906 more characters among `i' (ignore case), `m' (multi-line) and `s'
655 1907 (single-line). The `m' and `s' modifiers behave as in Perl regular
656 Value may also be an alist which specifies the presense and position 1908 expressions: `m' allows regexps to match more than one line, while `s'
657 of each bitmap individually. 1909 (which implies `m') means that `.' matches newlines. The ability to
658 1910 span newlines allows writing of much more powerful regular expressions
659 For example, ((top . left) (t . right)) places the top angle bitmap 1911 and rapid prototyping for tagging new languages.
660 in left fringe, the bottom angle bitmap in right fringe, and both 1912
661 arrow bitmaps in right fringe. To show just the angle bitmaps in the 1913 **** Regular expressions can use char escape sequences as in Gcc.
662 left fringe, but no arrow bitmaps, use ((top . left) (bottom . left)). 1914 The escaped character sequence \a, \b, \d, \e, \f, \n, \r, \t, \v,
663 1915 respectively, stand for the ASCII characters BEL, BS, DEL, ESC, FF, NL,
664 +++ 1916 CR, TAB, VT,
665 ** New command `display-local-help' displays any local help at point 1917
666 in the echo area. It is bound to `C-h .'. It normally displays the 1918 **** Regular expressions can be bound to a given language.
667 same string that would be displayed on mouse-over using the 1919 The syntax --regex={LANGUAGE}REGEX means that REGEX is used to make tags
668 `help-echo' property, but, in certain cases, it can display a more 1920 only for files of language LANGUAGE, and ignored otherwise. This is
669 keyboard oriented alternative. 1921 particularly useful when storing regexps in a file.
670 1922
671 +++ 1923 **** Regular expressions can be read from a file.
672 ** New user option `help-at-pt-display-when-idle' allows to 1924 The --regex=@regexfile option means read the regexps from a file, one
673 automatically show the help provided by `display-local-help' on 1925 per line. Lines beginning with space or tab are ignored.
674 point-over, after suitable idle time. The amount of idle time is 1926
675 determined by the user option `help-at-pt-timer-delay' and defaults 1927 *** New language parsing features
676 to one second. This feature is turned off by default. 1928
677 1929 **** The `::' qualifier triggers C++ parsing in C file.
678 --- 1930 Previously, only the `template' and `class' keywords had this effect.
679 ** New commands `scan-buf-next-region' and `scan-buf-previous-region' 1931
680 move to the start of the next (previous, respectively) region with 1932 **** The gnucc __attribute__ keyword is now recognised and ignored.
681 non-nil help-echo property and display any help found there in the 1933
682 echo area, using `display-local-help'. 1934 **** New language HTML.
683 1935 Title and h1, h2, h3 are tagged. Also, tags are generated when name= is
684 +++ 1936 used inside an anchor and whenever id= is used.
685 ** Help mode now only makes hyperlinks for faces when the face name is 1937
686 preceded or followed by the word `face'. It no longer makes 1938 **** In Makefiles, constants are tagged.
687 hyperlinks for variables without variable documentation, unless 1939 If you want the old behavior instead, thus avoiding to increase the
688 preceded by one of the words `variable' or `option'. It now makes 1940 size of the tags file, use the --no-globals option.
689 hyperlinks to Info anchors (or nodes) if the anchor (or node) name is 1941
690 enclosed in single quotes and preceded by `info anchor' or `Info 1942 **** New language Lua.
691 anchor' (in addition to earlier `info node' and `Info node'). 1943 All functions are tagged.
692 1944
693 +++ 1945 **** In Perl, packages are tags.
694 ** The max size of buffers and integers has been doubled. 1946 Subroutine tags are named from their package. You can jump to sub tags
695 On 32bit machines, it is now 256M (i.e. 268435455). 1947 as you did before, by the sub name, or additionally by looking for
696 1948 package::sub.
697 +++ 1949
698 ** The -f option, used from the command line to call a function, 1950 **** In Prolog, etags creates tags for rules in addition to predicates.
699 now reads arguments for the function interactively if it is 1951
700 an interactively callable function. 1952 **** New language PHP.
1953 Tags are functions, classes and defines.
1954 If the --members option is specified to etags, tags are variables also.
1955
1956 **** New default keywords for TeX.
1957 The new keywords are def, newcommand, renewcommand, newenvironment and
1958 renewenvironment.
1959
1960 *** Honour #line directives.
1961 When Etags parses an input file that contains C preprocessor's #line
1962 directives, it creates tags using the file name and line number
1963 specified in those directives. This is useful when dealing with code
1964 created from Cweb source files. When Etags tags the generated file, it
1965 writes tags pointing to the source file.
1966
1967 *** New option --parse-stdin=FILE.
1968 This option is mostly useful when calling etags from programs. It can
1969 be used (only once) in place of a file name on the command line. Etags
1970 reads from standard input and marks the produced tags as belonging to
1971 the file FILE.
1972
1973 ** VC Changes
1974
1975 +++
1976 *** The key C-x C-q no longer checks files in or out, it only changes
1977 the read-only state of the buffer (toggle-read-only). We made this
1978 change because we held a poll and found that many users were unhappy
1979 with the previous behavior. If you do prefer this behavior, you
1980 can bind `vc-toggle-read-only' to C-x C-q in your .emacs:
1981
1982 (global-set-key "\C-x\C-q" 'vc-toggle-read-only)
1983
1984 The function `vc-toggle-read-only' will continue to exist.
1985
1986 +++
1987 *** There is a new user option `vc-cvs-global-switches' that allows
1988 you to specify switches that are passed to any CVS command invoked
1989 by VC. These switches are used as "global options" for CVS, which
1990 means they are inserted before the command name. For example, this
1991 allows you to specify a compression level using the "-z#" option for
1992 CVS.
1993
1994 +++
1995 *** New backends for Subversion and Meta-CVS.
1996
1997 +++
1998 ** vc-annotate-mode enhancements
1999
2000 In vc-annotate mode, you can now use the following key bindings for
2001 enhanced functionality to browse the annotations of past revisions, or
2002 to view diffs or log entries directly from vc-annotate-mode:
2003
2004 P: annotates the previous revision
2005 N: annotates the next revision
2006 J: annotates the revision at line
2007 A: annotates the revision previous to line
2008 D: shows the diff of the revision at line with its previous revision
2009 L: shows the log of the revision at line
2010 W: annotates the workfile (most up to date) version
2011
2012 +++
2013 ** In pcl-cvs mode, there is a new `d y' command to view the diffs
2014 between the local version of the file and yesterday's head revision
2015 in the repository.
2016
2017 +++
2018 ** In pcl-cvs mode, there is a new `d r' command to view the changes
2019 anyone has committed to the repository since you last executed
2020 "checkout", "update" or "commit". That means using cvs diff options
2021 -rBASE -rHEAD.
2022
2023 +++
2024 ** There is a new user option `mail-default-directory' that allows you
2025 to specify the value of `default-directory' for mail buffers. This
2026 directory is used for auto-save files of mail buffers. It defaults to
2027 "~/".
2028
2029 +++
2030 ** Emacs can now indicate in the mode-line the presence of new e-mail
2031 in a directory or in a file. See the documentation of the user option
2032 `display-time-mail-directory'.
2033
2034 ---
2035 ** PO translation files are decoded according to their MIME headers
2036 when Emacs visits them.
2037
2038 ** Gnus package
2039
2040 ---
2041 *** Gnus now includes Sieve and PGG
2042 Sieve is a library for managing Sieve scripts. PGG is a library to handle
2043 PGP/MIME.
2044
2045 ---
2046 *** There are many news features, bug fixes and improvements.
2047 See the file GNUS-NEWS or the node "Oort Gnus" in the Gnus manual for details.
2048
2049 ---
2050 ** Rmail now displays 5-digit message ids in its summary buffer.
2051
2052 +++
2053 ** Support for `movemail' from GNU mailutils was added to Rmail.
2054 This version of `movemail' allows to read mail from a wide range of
2055 mailbox formats, including remote POP3 and IMAP4 mailboxes with or
2056 without TLS encryption. If GNU mailutils is installed on the system
2057 and its version of `movemail' can be found in exec-path, it will be
2058 used instead of the native one.
2059
2060 ---
2061 ** MH-E changes.
2062
2063 Upgraded to MH-E version 7.82. There have been major changes since
2064 version 5.0.2; see MH-E-NEWS for details.
2065
2066 +++
2067 ** There is a new calendar package, icalendar.el, that can be used to
2068 convert Emacs diary entries to/from the iCalendar format.
2069
2070 +++
2071 ** Diary sexp entries can have custom marking in the calendar.
2072 Diary sexp functions which only apply to certain days (such as
2073 `diary-block' or `diary-cyclic') now take an optional parameter MARK,
2074 which is the name of a face or a single-character string indicating
2075 how to highlight the day in the calendar display. Specifying a
2076 single-character string as @var{mark} places the character next to the
2077 day in the calendar. Specifying a face highlights the day with that
2078 face. This lets you have different colors or markings for vacations,
2079 appointments, paydays or anything else using a sexp.
2080
2081 +++
2082 ** The new function `calendar-goto-day-of-year' (g D) prompts for a
2083 year and day number, and moves to that date. Negative day numbers
2084 count backward from the end of the year.
2085
2086 +++
2087 ** The new Calendar function `calendar-goto-iso-week' (g w)
2088 prompts for a year and a week number, and moves to the first
2089 day of that ISO week.
2090
2091 ---
2092 ** The new variable `calendar-minimum-window-height' affects the
2093 window generated by the function `generate-calendar-window'.
2094
2095 ---
2096 ** The functions `holiday-easter-etc' and `holiday-advent' now take
2097 optional arguments, in order to only report on the specified holiday
2098 rather than all. This makes customization of variables such as
2099 `christian-holidays' simpler.
2100
2101 ---
2102 ** The function `simple-diary-display' now by default sets a header line.
2103 This can be controlled through the variables `diary-header-line-flag'
2104 and `diary-header-line-format'.
2105
2106 +++
2107 ** The procedure for activating appointment reminders has changed: use
2108 the new function `appt-activate'. The new variable
2109 `appt-display-format' controls how reminders are displayed, replacing
2110 appt-issue-message, appt-visible, and appt-msg-window.
2111
2112 +++
2113 ** The new functions `diary-from-outlook', `diary-from-outlook-gnus',
2114 and `diary-from-outlook-rmail' can be used to import diary entries
2115 from Outlook-format appointments in mail messages. The variable
2116 `diary-outlook-formats' can be customized to recognize additional
2117 formats.
2118
2119 +++
2120 ** Emacs now supports drag and drop for X. Dropping a file on a window
2121 opens it, dropping text inserts the text. Dropping a file on a dired
2122 buffer copies or moves the file to that directory.
2123
2124 +++
2125 ** Under X11, it is possible to swap Alt and Meta (and Super and Hyper).
2126 The new variables `x-alt-keysym', `x-hyper-keysym', `x-meta-keysym',
2127 and `x-super-keysym' can be used to choose which keysyms Emacs should
2128 use for the modifiers. For example, the following two lines swap
2129 Meta and Alt:
2130 (setq x-alt-keysym 'meta)
2131 (setq x-meta-keysym 'alt)
2132
2133 +++
2134 ** The X resource useXIM can be used to turn off use of XIM, which may
2135 speed up Emacs with slow networking to the X server.
2136
2137 If the configure option `--without-xim' was used to turn off use of
2138 XIM by default, the X resource useXIM can be used to turn it on.
2139
2140 ---
2141 ** The new variable `x-select-request-type' controls how Emacs
2142 requests X selection. The default value is nil, which means that
2143 Emacs requests X selection with types COMPOUND_TEXT and UTF8_STRING,
2144 and use the more appropriately result.
2145
2146 ---
2147 ** The scrollbar under LessTif or Motif has a smoother drag-scrolling.
2148 On the other hand, the size of the thumb does not represent the actual
2149 amount of text shown any more (only a crude approximation of it).
2150
2151 ---
2152 ** The pop up menus for Lucid now stay up if you do a fast click and can
2153 be navigated with the arrow keys (like Gtk+, Mac and W32).
2154
2155 +++
2156 ** The Lucid menus can display multilingual text in your locale. You have
2157 to explicitly specify a fontSet resource for this to work, for example
2158 `-xrm "Emacs*fontSet: -*-helvetica-medium-r-*--*-120-*-*-*-*-*-*,*"'.
2159
2160 ---
2161 ** Dialogs for Lucid/Athena and Lesstif/Motif now pops down when pressing
2162 ESC, like they do for Gtk+, Mac and W32.
2163
2164 ---
2165 ** Dialogs and menus pop down if you type C-g.
2166
2167 ---
2168 ** The menu item "Open File..." has been split into two items, "New File..."
2169 and "Open File...". "Open File..." now opens only existing files. This is
2170 to support existing GUI file selection dialogs better.
2171
2172 +++
2173 ** The file selection dialog for Gtk+, Mac, W32 and Motif/Lesstif can be
2174 disabled by customizing the variable `use-file-dialog'.
2175
2176 +++
2177 ** For Gtk+ version 2.4, you can make Emacs use the old file dialog
2178 by setting the variable `x-use-old-gtk-file-dialog' to t. Default is to use
2179 the new dialog.
2180
2181 ---
2182 ** Emacs now responds to mouse-clicks on the mode-line, header-line and
2183 display margin, when run in an xterm.
2184
2185 ** Improved key bindings support when running in an xterm.
2186 When emacs is running in an xterm more key bindings are available. The
2187 following should work:
2188 {C,S,C-S,A}-{right,left,up,down,prior,next,delete,insert,F1-12}.
2189 These key bindings work on xterm from X.org 6.8, they might not work on
2190 some older versions of xterm, or on some proprietary versions.
2191
2192 ** Changes in support of colors on character terminals
2193
2194 +++
2195 *** The new command-line option --color=MODE lets you specify a standard
2196 mode for a tty color support. It is meant to be used on character
2197 terminals whose capabilities are not set correctly in the terminal
2198 database, or with terminal emulators which support colors, but don't
2199 set the TERM environment variable to a name of a color-capable
2200 terminal. "emacs --color" uses the same color commands as GNU `ls'
2201 when invoked with "ls --color", so if your terminal can support colors
2202 in "ls --color", it will support "emacs --color" as well. See the
2203 user manual for the possible values of the MODE parameter.
2204
2205 ---
2206 *** Emacs now supports several character terminals which provide more
2207 than 8 colors. For example, for `xterm', 16-color, 88-color, and
2208 256-color modes are supported. Emacs automatically notes at startup
2209 the extended number of colors, and defines the appropriate entries for
2210 all of these colors.
2211
2212 +++
2213 *** Emacs now uses the full range of available colors for the default
2214 faces when running on a color terminal, including 16-, 88-, and
2215 256-color xterms. This means that when you run "emacs -nw" on an
2216 88-color or 256-color xterm, you will see essentially the same face
2217 colors as on X.
2218
2219 ---
2220 *** There's a new support for colors on `rxvt' terminal emulator.
2221
2222 +++
2223 ** Passing resources on the command line now works on MS Windows.
2224 You can use --xrm to pass resource settings to Emacs, overriding any
2225 existing values. For example:
2226
2227 emacs --xrm "Emacs.Background:red" --xrm "Emacs.Geometry:100x20"
2228
2229 will start up Emacs on an initial frame of 100x20 with red background,
2230 irrespective of geometry or background setting on the Windows registry.
2231
2232 ---
2233 ** On MS Windows, the "system caret" now follows the cursor.
2234 This enables Emacs to work better with programs that need to track
2235 the cursor, for example screen magnifiers and text to speech programs.
2236
2237 ---
2238 ** Tooltips now work on MS Windows.
2239 See the Emacs 21.1 NEWS entry for tooltips for details.
2240
2241 ---
2242 ** Images are now supported on MS Windows.
2243 PBM and XBM images are supported out of the box. Other image formats
2244 depend on external libraries. All of these libraries have been ported
2245 to Windows, and can be found in both source and binary form at
2246 http://gnuwin32.sourceforge.net/. Note that libpng also depends on
2247 zlib, and tiff depends on the version of jpeg that it was compiled
2248 against. For additional information, see nt/INSTALL.
2249
2250 ---
2251 ** Sound is now supported on MS Windows.
2252 WAV format is supported on all versions of Windows, other formats such
2253 as AU, AIFF and MP3 may be supported in the more recent versions of
2254 Windows, or when other software provides hooks into the system level
2255 sound support for those formats.
2256
2257 ---
2258 ** Different shaped mouse pointers are supported on MS Windows.
2259 The mouse pointer changes shape depending on what is under the pointer.
2260
2261 ---
2262 ** Pointing devices with more than 3 buttons are now supported on MS Windows.
2263 The new variable `w32-pass-extra-mouse-buttons-to-system' controls
2264 whether Emacs should handle the extra buttons itself (the default), or
2265 pass them to Windows to be handled with system-wide functions.
2266
2267 ---
2268 ** Emacs takes note of colors defined in Control Panel on MS-Windows.
2269 The Control Panel defines some default colors for applications in much
2270 the same way as wildcard X Resources do on X. Emacs now adds these
2271 colors to the colormap prefixed by System (eg SystemMenu for the
2272 default Menu background, SystemMenuText for the foreground), and uses
2273 some of them to initialize some of the default faces.
2274 `list-colors-display' shows the list of System color names, in case
2275 you wish to use them in other faces.
2276
2277 ---
2278 ** On MS Windows NT/W2K/XP, Emacs uses Unicode for clipboard operations.
2279 Those systems use Unicode internally, so this allows Emacs to share
2280 multilingual text with other applications. On other versions of
2281 MS Windows, Emacs now uses the appropriate locale coding-system, so
2282 the clipboard should work correctly for your local language without
2283 any customizations.
2284
2285 ---
2286 ** On Mac OS, the value of the variable `keyboard-coding-system' is
2287 now dynamically changed according to the current keyboard script. The
2288 variable `mac-keyboard-text-encoding' and the constants
2289 `kTextEncodingMacRoman', `kTextEncodingISOLatin1', and
2290 `kTextEncodingISOLatin2' are obsolete.
701 2291
702 --- 2292 ---
703 ** sql changes. 2293 ** sql changes.
704 2294
705 *** The variable `sql-product' controls the highlightng of different 2295 *** The variable `sql-product' controls the highlightng of different
770 *** Added SQL->Start SQLi Session menu entry which calls the 2360 *** Added SQL->Start SQLi Session menu entry which calls the
771 appropriate sql-interactive-mode wrapper for the current setting of 2361 appropriate sql-interactive-mode wrapper for the current setting of
772 `sql-product'. 2362 `sql-product'.
773 2363
774 --- 2364 ---
2365 *** Support for the SQLite interpreter has been added to sql.el by calling
2366 'sql-sqlite'.
2367
2368 ---
775 ** M-x view-file and commands that use it now avoid interfering 2369 ** M-x view-file and commands that use it now avoid interfering
776 with special modes such as Tar mode. 2370 with special modes such as Tar mode.
777 2371
778 ** Enhancements to apropos commands: 2372 +++
779 2373 ** Filesets are collections of files. You can define a fileset in
780 +++ 2374 various ways, such as based on a directory tree or based on
781 *** The apropos commands now accept a list of words to match. 2375 program files that include other program files.
782 When more than one word is specified, at least two of those words must 2376
783 be present for an item to match. Regular expression matching is still 2377 Once you have defined a fileset, you can perform various operations on
784 available. 2378 all the files in it, such as visiting them or searching and replacing
785 2379 in them.
786 +++ 2380
787 *** The new option `apropos-sort-by-scores' causes the matching items 2381 ---
788 to be sorted according to their score. The score for an item is a 2382 ** Commands winner-redo and winner-undo, from winner.el, are now bound to
789 number calculated to indicate how well the item matches the words or 2383 C-c <left> and C-c <right>, respectively. This is an incompatible change.
790 regular expression that you entered to the apropos command. The best
791 match is listed first, and the calculated score is shown for each
792 matching item.
793
794 +++
795 ** The old bindings C-M-delete and C-M-backspace have been deleted,
796 since there are situations where one or the other will shut down
797 the operating system or your X server.
798
799 ---
800 ** New minor mode, Visible mode, toggles invisibility in the current buffer.
801 When enabled, it makes all invisible text visible. When disabled, it
802 restores the previous value of `buffer-invisibility-spec'.
803
804 ---
805 ** New command `kill-whole-line' kills an entire line at once.
806 By default, it is bound to C-S-<backspace>.
807
808 ---
809 ** New commands to operate on pairs of open and close characters:
810 `insert-pair', `delete-pair', `raise-sexp'.
811
812 +++
813 ** A prefix argument of C-M-q in Emacs Lisp mode pretty-printifies the
814 list starting after point.
815
816 ** Dired mode:
817
818 ---
819 *** New faces dired-header, dired-mark, dired-marked, dired-flagged,
820 dired-ignored, dired-directory, dired-symlink, dired-warning
821 introduced for Dired mode instead of font-lock faces.
822
823 +++
824 *** New Dired command `dired-compare-directories' marks files
825 with different file attributes in two dired buffers.
826
827 +++
828 *** New Dired command `dired-do-touch' (bound to T) changes timestamps
829 of marked files with the value entered in the minibuffer.
830
831 +++
832 *** In Dired's ! command (dired-do-shell-command), `*' and `?' now
833 control substitution of the file names only when they are surrounded
834 by whitespace. This means you can now use them as shell wildcards
835 too. If you want to use just plain `*' as a wildcard, type `*""'; the
836 doublequotes make no difference in the shell, but they prevent
837 special treatment in `dired-do-shell-command'.
838
839 +++
840 *** In Dired, the w command now copies the current line's file name
841 into the kill ring. With a zero prefix arg, copies absolute file names.
842
843 +++
844 ** Dired-x:
845
846 +++
847 *** Omitting files is now a minor mode, dired-omit-mode. The mode toggling
848 command is bound to M-o. A new command dired-mark-omitted, bound to * O,
849 marks omitted files. The variable dired-omit-files-p is obsoleted, use the
850 mode toggling function instead.
851
852 +++
853 ** find-file-read-only visits multiple files in read-only mode,
854 when the file name contains wildcard characters.
855
856 +++
857 ** find-alternate-file replaces the current file with multiple files,
858 when the file name contains wildcard characters.
859 2384
860 ** FFAP 2385 ** FFAP
861 2386
862 +++ 2387 +++
863 *** New ffap commands and keybindings: C-x C-r (`ffap-read-only'), 2388 *** New ffap commands and keybindings: C-x C-r (`ffap-read-only'),
867 2392
868 --- 2393 ---
869 *** FFAP accepts wildcards in a file name by default. C-x C-f passes 2394 *** FFAP accepts wildcards in a file name by default. C-x C-f passes
870 it to `find-file' with non-nil WILDCARDS argument, which visits 2395 it to `find-file' with non-nil WILDCARDS argument, which visits
871 multiple files, and C-x d passes it to `dired'. 2396 multiple files, and C-x d passes it to `dired'.
872
873 ** Info mode:
874
875 +++
876 *** A numeric prefix argument of `info' selects an Info buffer
877 with the number appended to the *info* buffer name (e.g. "*info*<2>").
878
879 ---
880 *** isearch in Info uses Info-search and searches through multiple nodes.
881 Before leaving the initial Info node isearch fails once with the error
882 message [initial node], and with subsequent C-s/C-r continues through
883 other nodes. When isearch fails for the rest of the manual, it wraps
884 aroung the whole manual to the top/final node. The user option
885 `Info-isearch-search' controls whether to use Info-search for isearch,
886 or the default isearch search function that wraps around the current
887 Info node.
888
889 *** New search commands: `Info-search-case-sensitively' (bound to S),
890 `Info-search-backward', and `Info-search-next' which repeats the last
891 search without prompting for a new search string.
892
893 *** New command `Info-history-forward' (bound to r and new toolbar icon)
894 moves forward in history to the node you returned from after using
895 `Info-history-back' (renamed from `Info-last').
896
897 *** New command `Info-history' (bound to L) displays a menu of visited nodes.
898
899 *** New command `Info-toc' (bound to T) creates a node with table of contents
900 from the tree structure of menus of the current Info file.
901
902 *** New command `info-apropos' searches the indices of the known
903 Info files on your system for a string, and builds a menu of the
904 possible matches.
905
906 *** New command `Info-copy-current-node-name' (bound to w) copies
907 the current Info node name into the kill ring. With a zero prefix
908 arg, puts the node name inside the `info' function call.
909
910 ---
911 *** New face `info-xref-visited' distinguishes visited nodes from unvisited
912 and a new option `Info-fontify-visited-nodes' to control this.
913
914 *** http and ftp links in Info are now operational: they look like cross
915 references and following them calls `browse-url'.
916
917 +++
918 *** Info now hides node names in menus and cross references by default.
919 If you prefer the old behavior, you can set the new user option
920 `Info-hide-note-references' to nil.
921
922 ---
923 *** Images in Info pages are supported.
924 Info pages show embedded images, in Emacs frames with image support.
925 Info documentation that includes images, processed with makeinfo
926 version 4.7 or newer, compiles to Info pages with embedded images.
927
928 +++
929 *** The default value for `Info-scroll-prefer-subnodes' is now nil.
930
931 ---
932 *** Info-index offers completion.
933
934 ---
935 ** Support for the SQLite interpreter has been added to sql.el by calling
936 'sql-sqlite'.
937
938 ** BibTeX mode:
939 *** The new command bibtex-url browses a URL for the BibTeX entry at
940 point (bound to C-c C-l and mouse-2, RET on clickable fields).
941
942 *** The new command bibtex-entry-update (bound to C-c C-u) updates
943 an existing BibTeX entry.
944
945 *** New `bibtex-entry-format' option `required-fields', enabled by default.
946
947 *** bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries can take values `plain',
948 `crossref', and `entry-class' which control the sorting scheme used
949 for BibTeX entries. `bibtex-sort-entry-class' controls the sorting
950 scheme `entry-class'. TAB completion for reference keys and
951 automatic detection of duplicates does not require anymore that
952 bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is non-nil.
953
954 *** If the new variable bibtex-parse-keys-fast is non-nil,
955 use fast but simplified algorithm for parsing BibTeX keys.
956
957 *** If the new variable bibtex-autoadd-commas is non-nil,
958 automatically add missing commas at end of BibTeX fields.
959
960 *** The new variable bibtex-autofill-types contains a list of entry
961 types for which fields are filled automatically (if possible).
962
963 *** The new command bibtex-complete completes word fragment before
964 point according to context (bound to M-tab).
965
966 *** The new commands bibtex-find-entry and bibtex-find-crossref
967 locate entries and crossref'd entries (bound to C-c C-s and C-c C-x).
968 Crossref fields are clickable (bound to mouse-2, RET).
969
970 *** In BibTeX mode the command fill-paragraph (bound to M-q) fills
971 individual fields of a BibTeX entry.
972
973 *** The new variables bibtex-files and bibtex-file-path define a set
974 of BibTeX files that are searched for entry keys.
975
976 *** The new command bibtex-validate-globally checks for duplicate keys
977 in multiple BibTeX files.
978
979 *** The new command bibtex-copy-summary-as-kill pushes summary
980 of BibTeX entry to kill ring (bound to C-c C-t).
981
982 +++
983 ** When display margins are present in a window, the fringes are now
984 displayed between the margins and the buffer's text area, rather than
985 at the edges of the window.
986
987 +++
988 ** A window may now have individual fringe and scroll-bar settings,
989 in addition to the individual display margin settings.
990
991 Such individual settings are now preserved when windows are split
992 horizontally or vertically, a saved window configuration is restored,
993 or when the frame is resized.
994
995 +++
996 ** New functions frame-current-scroll-bars and window-current-scroll-bars.
997
998 These functions return the current locations of the vertical and
999 horizontal scroll bars in a frame or window.
1000
1001 +++
1002 ** Emacs now supports drag and drop for X. Dropping a file on a window
1003 opens it, dropping text inserts the text. Dropping a file on a dired
1004 buffer copies or moves the file to that directory.
1005
1006 +++
1007 ** Under X, mouse-wheel-mode is turned on by default.
1008
1009 +++
1010 ** The X resource useXIM can be used to turn off use of XIM, which may
1011 speed up Emacs with slow networking to the X server.
1012
1013 If the configure option `--without-xim' was used to turn off use of
1014 XIM by default, the X resource useXIM can be used to turn it on.
1015
1016 +++
1017 ** The X resource cursorBlink can be used to turn off cursor blinking.
1018
1019 +++
1020 ** `undo-only' does an undo which does not redo any previous undo.
1021
1022 ---
1023 ** `uniquify-strip-common-suffix' tells uniquify to prefer
1024 `file|dir1' and `file|dir2' to `file|dir1/subdir' and `file|dir2/subdir'.
1025
1026 +++
1027 ** If the user visits a file larger than `large-file-warning-threshold',
1028 Emacs prompts her for confirmation.
1029
1030 ---
1031 ** A UTF-7 coding system is available in the library `utf-7'.
1032
1033 ---
1034 ** GUD mode has its own tool bar for controlling execution of the inferior
1035 and other common debugger commands.
1036
1037 ---
1038 ** recentf changes.
1039
1040 The recent file list is now automatically cleanup when recentf mode is
1041 enabled. The new option `recentf-auto-cleanup' controls when to do
1042 automatic cleanup.
1043
1044 The `recentf-keep' option replaces `recentf-keep-non-readable-files-p'
1045 and provides a more general mechanism to customize which file names to
1046 keep in the recent list.
1047
1048 With the more advanced option: `recentf-filename-handler', you can
1049 specify a function that transforms filenames handled by recentf. For
1050 example, if set to `file-truename', the same file will not be in the
1051 recent list with different symbolic links.
1052
1053 To follow naming convention, `recentf-menu-append-commands-flag'
1054 replaces the misnamed option `recentf-menu-append-commands-p'. The
1055 old name remains available as alias, but has been marked obsolete.
1056
1057 +++
1058 ** The default for the paper size (variable ps-paper-type) is taken
1059 from the locale.
1060
1061 +++
1062 ** Init file changes
1063
1064 You can now put the init files .emacs and .emacs_SHELL under
1065 ~/.emacs.d or directly under ~. Emacs will find them in either place.
1066
1067 ---
1068 ** partial-completion-mode now does partial completion on directory names.
1069 2397
1070 --- 2398 ---
1071 ** skeleton.el now supports using - to mark the skeleton-point without 2399 ** skeleton.el now supports using - to mark the skeleton-point without
1072 interregion interaction. @ has reverted to only setting 2400 interregion interaction. @ has reverted to only setting
1073 skeleton-positions and no longer sets skeleton-point. Skeletons 2401 skeleton-positions and no longer sets skeleton-point. Skeletons
1074 which used @ to mark skeleton-point independent of _ should now use - 2402 which used @ to mark skeleton-point independent of _ should now use -
1075 instead. The updated skeleton-insert docstring explains these new 2403 instead. The updated skeleton-insert docstring explains these new
1076 features along with other details of skeleton construction. 2404 features along with other details of skeleton construction.
1077 2405
1078 --- 2406 ---
1079 ** MH-E changes.
1080
1081 Upgraded to MH-E version 7.82. There have been major changes since
1082 version 5.0.2; see MH-E-NEWS for details.
1083
1084 +++
1085 ** The `emacsclient' command understands the options `--eval' and
1086 `--display' which tell Emacs respectively to evaluate the given elisp
1087 expression and to use the given display when visiting files.
1088
1089 +++
1090 ** User option `server-mode' can be used to start a server process.
1091
1092 +++
1093 ** The mode line position information now comes before the major mode.
1094 When the file is maintained under version control, that information
1095 appears between the position information and the major mode.
1096
1097 +++
1098 ** C-x s (save-some-buffers) now offers an option `d' to diff a buffer
1099 against its file, so you can see what changes you would be saving.
1100
1101 +++
1102 ** You can now customize the use of window fringes. To control this
1103 for all frames, use M-x fringe-mode or the Show/Hide submenu of the
1104 top-level Options menu, or customize the `fringe-mode' variable. To
1105 control this for a specific frame, use the command M-x
1106 set-fringe-style.
1107
1108 +++
1109 ** There is a new user option `mail-default-directory' that allows you
1110 to specify the value of `default-directory' for mail buffers. This
1111 directory is used for auto-save files of mail buffers. It defaults to
1112 "~/".
1113
1114 +++
1115 ** When you are root, and you visit a file whose modes specify
1116 read-only, the Emacs buffer is now read-only too. Type C-x C-q if you
1117 want to make the buffer writable. (As root, you can in fact alter the
1118 file.)
1119
1120 +++
1121 ** The new command `revert-buffer-with-coding-system' (C-x RET r)
1122 revisits the current file using a coding system that you specify.
1123
1124 +++
1125 ** The new command `recode-file-name' changes the encoding of the name
1126 of a file.
1127
1128 ---
1129 ** `ps-print' can now print characters from the mule-unicode charsets.
1130
1131 Printing text with characters from the mule-unicode-* sets works with
1132 ps-print, provided that you have installed the appropriate BDF fonts.
1133 See the file INSTALL for URLs where you can find these fonts.
1134
1135 ---
1136 ** The new options `buffers-menu-show-directories' and
1137 `buffers-menu-show-status' let you control how buffers are displayed
1138 in the menu dropped down when you click "Buffers" from the menu bar.
1139
1140 `buffers-menu-show-directories' controls whether the menu displays
1141 leading directories as part of the file name visited by the buffer.
1142 If its value is `unless-uniquify', the default, directories are
1143 shown unless uniquify-buffer-name-style' is non-nil. The value of nil
1144 and t turn the display of directories off and on, respectively.
1145
1146 `buffers-menu-show-status' controls whether the Buffers menu includes
1147 the modified and read-only status of the buffers. By default it is
1148 t, and the status is shown.
1149
1150 Setting these variables directly does not take effect until next time
1151 the Buffers menu is regenerated.
1152
1153 +++
1154 ** The commands M-x customize-face and M-x customize-face-other-window
1155 now look at the character after point. If a face or faces are
1156 specified for that character, the commands by default customize those
1157 faces.
1158
1159 ---
1160 ** New language environments: French, Ukrainian, Tajik,
1161 Bulgarian, Belarusian, Ukrainian, UTF-8, Windows-1255, Welsh, Latin-6,
1162 Latin-7, Lithuanian, Latvian, Swedish, Slovenian, Croatian, Georgian,
1163 Italian, Russian, Malayalam, Tamil, Russian, Chinese-EUC-TW. (Set up
1164 automatically according to the locale.)
1165
1166 ---
1167 ** Indian support has been updated.
1168 The in-is13194 coding system is now Unicode-based. CDAC fonts are
1169 assumed. There is a framework for supporting various
1170 Indian scripts, but currently only Devanagari, Malayalam and Tamil are
1171 supported.
1172
1173 ---
1174 ** New input methods: latin-alt-postfix, latin-postfix, latin-prefix,
1175 ukrainian-computer, belarusian, bulgarian-bds, russian-computer,
1176 vietnamese-telex, lithuanian-numeric, lithuanian-keyboard,
1177 latvian-keyboard, welsh, georgian, rfc1345, ucs, sgml,
1178 bulgarian-phonetic, dutch, slovenian, croatian, malayalam-inscript,
1179 tamil-inscript.
1180
1181 ---
1182 ** A new coding system `euc-tw' has been added for traditional Chinese
1183 in CNS encoding; it accepts both Big 5 and CNS as input; on saving,
1184 Big 5 is then converted to CNS.
1185
1186 ---
1187 ** Many new coding systems are available by loading the `code-pages'
1188 library. These include complete versions of most of those in
1189 codepage.el, based on Unicode mappings. `codepage-setup' is now
1190 obsolete and is used only in the MS-DOS port of Emacs. windows-1252
1191 and windows-1251 are preloaded since the former is so common and the
1192 latter is used by GNU locales.
1193
1194 ---
1195 ** The utf-8/16 coding systems have been enhanced.
1196 By default, untranslatable utf-8 sequences are simply composed into
1197 single quasi-characters. User option `utf-translate-cjk-mode' (it is
1198 turned on by default) arranges to translate many utf-8 CJK character
1199 sequences into real Emacs characters in a similar way to the Mule-UCS
1200 system. As this loads a fairly big data on demand, people who are not
1201 interested in CJK characters may want to customize it to nil.
1202 You can augment/amend the CJK translation via hash tables
1203 `ucs-mule-cjk-to-unicode' and `ucs-unicode-to-mule-cjk'. The utf-8
1204 coding system now also encodes characters from most of Emacs's
1205 one-dimensional internal charsets, specifically the ISO-8859 ones.
1206 The utf-16 coding system is affected similarly.
1207
1208 ---
1209 ** New variable `utf-translate-cjk-unicode-range' controls which
1210 Unicode characters to translate in `utf-translate-cjk-mode'.
1211
1212 ---
1213 ** iso-10646-1 (`Unicode') fonts can be used to display any range of
1214 characters encodable by the utf-8 coding system. Just specify the
1215 fontset appropriately.
1216
1217 ---
1218 ** New command `ucs-insert' inserts a character specified by its
1219 unicode.
1220
1221 +++
1222 ** Limited support for character `unification' has been added.
1223 Emacs now knows how to translate between different representations of
1224 the same characters in various Emacs charsets according to standard
1225 Unicode mappings. This applies mainly to characters in the ISO 8859
1226 sets plus some other 8-bit sets, but can be extended. For instance,
1227 translation works amongst the Emacs ...-iso8859-... charsets and the
1228 mule-unicode-... ones.
1229
1230 By default this translation happens automatically on encoding.
1231 Self-inserting characters are translated to make the input conformant
1232 with the encoding of the buffer in which it's being used, where
1233 possible.
1234
1235 You can force a more complete unification with the user option
1236 unify-8859-on-decoding-mode. That maps all the Latin-N character sets
1237 into Unicode characters (from the latin-iso8859-1 and
1238 mule-unicode-0100-24ff charsets) on decoding. Note that this mode
1239 will often effectively clobber data with an iso-2022 encoding.
1240
1241 ---
1242 ** There is support for decoding Greek and Cyrillic characters into
1243 either Unicode (the mule-unicode charsets) or the iso-8859 charsets,
1244 when possible. The latter are more space-efficient. This is
1245 controlled by user option utf-fragment-on-decoding.
1246
1247 +++
1248 ** The new command `set-file-name-coding-system' (C-x RET F) sets
1249 coding system for encoding and decoding file names. A new menu item
1250 (Options->Mule->Set Coding Systems->For File Name) invokes this
1251 command.
1252
1253 ---
1254 ** The scrollbar under LessTif or Motif has a smoother drag-scrolling.
1255 On the other hand, the size of the thumb does not represent the actual
1256 amount of text shown any more (only a crude approximation of it).
1257
1258 ---
1259 ** The pop up menus for Lucid now stay up if you do a fast click and can
1260 be navigated with the arrow keys (like Gtk+, Mac and W32).
1261
1262 +++
1263 ** The Lucid menus can display multilingual text in your locale. You have
1264 to explicitly specify a fontSet resource for this to work, for example
1265 `-xrm "Emacs*fontSet: -*-helvetica-medium-r-*--*-120-*-*-*-*-*-*,*"'.
1266
1267 ---
1268 ** Dialogs for Lucid/Athena and Lesstif/Motif now pops down when pressing
1269 ESC, like they do for Gtk+, Mac and W32.
1270
1271 ---
1272 ** Dialogs and menus pop down when pressing C-g.
1273
1274 ---
1275 ** The menu item "Open File..." has been split into two items, "New File..."
1276 and "Open File...". "Open File..." now opens only existing files. This is
1277 to support existing GUI file selection dialogs better.
1278
1279 +++
1280 ** The file selection dialog for Gtk+, Mac, W32 and Motif/Lesstif can be
1281 disabled by customizing the variable `use-file-dialog'.
1282
1283 +++
1284 ** For Gtk+ version 2.4, you can make Emacs use the old file dialog
1285 by setting the variable `x-use-old-gtk-file-dialog' to t. Default is to use
1286 the new dialog.
1287
1288 +++
1289 ** Emacs can produce an underscore-like (horizontal bar) cursor.
1290 The underscore cursor is set by putting `(cursor-type . hbar)' in
1291 default-frame-alist. It supports variable heights, like the `bar'
1292 cursor does.
1293
1294 +++
1295 ** On X, MS Windows, and Mac OS, the blinking cursor's "off" state is
1296 now controlled by the variable `blink-cursor-alist'.
1297
1298 +++
1299 ** Filesets are collections of files. You can define a fileset in
1300 various ways, such as based on a directory tree or based on
1301 program files that include other program files.
1302
1303 Once you have defined a fileset, you can perform various operations on
1304 all the files in it, such as visiting them or searching and replacing
1305 in them.
1306
1307 ---
1308 ** PO translation files are decoded according to their MIME headers
1309 when Emacs visits them.
1310
1311 ---
1312 ** The game `mpuz' is enhanced.
1313
1314 `mpuz' now allows the 2nd factor not to have two identical digits. By
1315 default, all trivial operations involving whole lines are performed
1316 automatically. The game uses faces for better visual feedback.
1317
1318 ---
1319 ** The new variable `x-select-request-type' controls how Emacs
1320 requests X selection. The default value is nil, which means that
1321 Emacs requests X selection with types COMPOUND_TEXT and UTF8_STRING,
1322 and use the more appropriately result.
1323
1324 +++
1325 ** The parameters of automatic hscrolling can now be customized.
1326 The variable `hscroll-margin' determines how many columns away from
1327 the window edge point is allowed to get before automatic hscrolling
1328 will horizontally scroll the window. The default value is 5.
1329
1330 The variable `hscroll-step' determines how many columns automatic
1331 hscrolling scrolls the window when point gets too close to the
1332 window edge. If its value is zero, the default, Emacs scrolls the
1333 window so as to center point. If its value is an integer, it says how
1334 many columns to scroll. If the value is a floating-point number, it
1335 gives the fraction of the window's width to scroll the window.
1336
1337 The variable `automatic-hscrolling' was renamed to
1338 `auto-hscroll-mode'. The old name is still available as an alias.
1339
1340 ** TeX modes:
1341
1342 +++
1343 *** C-c C-c prompts for a command to run, and tries to offer a good default.
1344
1345 +++
1346 *** The user option `tex-start-options-string' has been replaced
1347 by two new user options: `tex-start-options', which should hold
1348 command-line options to feed to TeX, and `tex-start-commands' which should hold
1349 TeX commands to use at startup.
1350
1351 ---
1352 *** verbatim environments are now highlighted in courier by font-lock
1353 and super/sub-scripts are made into super/sub-scripts.
1354
1355 +++
1356 *** New major mode doctex-mode for *.dtx files.
1357
1358 +++
1359 ** New display feature: focus follows the mouse from one Emacs window
1360 to another, even within a frame. If you set the variable
1361 mouse-autoselect-window to non-nil value, moving the mouse to a
1362 different Emacs window will select that window (minibuffer window can
1363 be selected only when it is active). The default is nil, so that this
1364 feature is not enabled.
1365
1366 +++
1367 ** On X, when the window manager requires that you click on a frame to
1368 select it (give it focus), the selected window and cursor position
1369 normally changes according to the mouse click position. If you set
1370 the variable x-mouse-click-focus-ignore-position to t, the selected
1371 window and cursor position do not change when you click on a frame
1372 to give it focus.
1373
1374 +++
1375 ** The new command `describe-char' (C-u C-x =) pops up a buffer with
1376 description various information about a character, including its
1377 encodings and syntax, its text properties, how to input, overlays, and
1378 widgets at point. You can get more information about some of them, by
1379 clicking on mouse-sensitive areas or moving there and pressing RET.
1380
1381 +++
1382 ** The new command `multi-occur' is just like `occur', except it can
1383 search multiple buffers. There is also a new command
1384 `multi-occur-by-filename-regexp' which allows you to specify the
1385 buffers to search by their filename. Internally, Occur mode has been
1386 rewritten, and now uses font-lock, among other changes.
1387
1388 +++
1389 ** The default values of paragraph-start and indent-line-function have
1390 been changed to reflect those used in Text mode rather than those used
1391 in Indented-Text mode.
1392
1393 ---
1394 ** New user option `query-replace-skip-read-only': when non-nil,
1395 `query-replace' and related functions simply ignore
1396 a match if part of it has a read-only property.
1397
1398 +++
1399 ** When used interactively, the commands `query-replace-regexp' and
1400 `replace-regexp' allow \,expr to be used in a replacement string,
1401 where expr is an arbitrary Lisp expression evaluated at replacement
1402 time. In many cases, this will be more convenient than using
1403 `query-replace-regexp-eval'. `\#' in a replacement string now refers
1404 to the count of replacements already made by the replacement command.
1405 All regular expression replacement commands now allow `\?' in the
1406 replacement string to specify a position where the replacement string
1407 can be edited for each replacement.
1408
1409 +++
1410 ** query-replace uses isearch lazy highlighting when the new user option
1411 `query-replace-lazy-highlight' is non-nil.
1412
1413 ---
1414 ** The current match in query-replace is highlighted in new face
1415 `query-replace' which by default inherits from isearch face.
1416
1417 +++
1418 ** Emacs normally highlights mouse sensitive text whenever the mouse
1419 is over the text. By setting the new variable `mouse-highlight', you
1420 can optionally enable mouse highlighting only after you move the
1421 mouse, so that highlighting disappears when you press a key. You can
1422 also disable mouse highlighting.
1423
1424 +++
1425 ** You can now customize if selecting a region by dragging the mouse
1426 shall not copy the selected text to the kill-ring by setting the new
1427 variable mouse-drag-copy-region to nil.
1428
1429 +++
1430 ** font-lock: in modes like C and Lisp where the fontification assumes that
1431 an open-paren in column 0 is always outside of any string or comment,
1432 font-lock now highlights any such open-paren-in-column-zero in bold-red
1433 if it is inside a string or a comment, to indicate that it can cause
1434 trouble with fontification and/or indentation.
1435
1436 +++
1437 ** There's a new face `minibuffer-prompt'.
1438 Emacs adds this face to the list of text properties stored in the
1439 variable `minibuffer-prompt-properties', which is used to display the
1440 prompt string.
1441
1442 +++
1443 ** The new face `mode-line-inactive' is used to display the mode line
1444 of non-selected windows. The `mode-line' face is now used to display
1445 the mode line of the currently selected window.
1446
1447 The new variable `mode-line-in-non-selected-windows' controls whether
1448 the `mode-line-inactive' face is used.
1449
1450 ---
1451 ** A menu item "Show/Hide" was added to the top-level menu "Options".
1452 This menu allows you to turn various display features on and off (such
1453 as the fringes, the tool bar, the speedbar, and the menu bar itself).
1454 You can also move the vertical scroll bar to either side here or turn
1455 it off completely. There is also a menu-item to toggle displaying of
1456 current date and time, current line and column number in the
1457 mode-line.
1458
1459 ---
1460 ** Speedbar has moved from the "Tools" top level menu to "Show/Hide".
1461
1462 +++
1463 ** Emacs can now indicate in the mode-line the presence of new e-mail
1464 in a directory or in a file. See the documentation of the user option
1465 `display-time-mail-directory'.
1466
1467 ---
1468 ** LDAP support now defaults to ldapsearch from OpenLDAP version 2.
1469
1470 +++
1471 ** You can now disable pc-selection-mode after enabling it.
1472 M-x pc-selection-mode behaves like a proper minor mode, and with no
1473 argument it toggles the mode.
1474
1475 Turning off PC-Selection mode restores the global key bindings
1476 that were replaced by turning on the mode.
1477
1478 +++
1479 ** Emacs now displays a splash screen by default even if command-line
1480 arguments were given. The new command-line option --no-splash
1481 disables the splash screen; see also the variable
1482 `inhibit-startup-message' (which is also aliased as
1483 `inhibit-splash-screen').
1484
1485 ** Changes in support of colors on character terminals
1486
1487 +++
1488 *** The new command-line option --color=MODE lets you specify a standard
1489 mode for a tty color support. It is meant to be used on character
1490 terminals whose capabilities are not set correctly in the terminal
1491 database, or with terminal emulators which support colors, but don't
1492 set the TERM environment variable to a name of a color-capable
1493 terminal. "emacs --color" uses the same color commands as GNU `ls'
1494 when invoked with "ls --color", so if your terminal can support colors
1495 in "ls --color", it will support "emacs --color" as well. See the
1496 user manual for the possible values of the MODE parameter.
1497
1498 ---
1499 *** Emacs now supports several character terminals which provide more
1500 than 8 colors. For example, for `xterm', 16-color, 88-color, and
1501 256-color modes are supported. Emacs automatically notes at startup
1502 the extended number of colors, and defines the appropriate entries for
1503 all of these colors.
1504
1505 +++
1506 *** Emacs now uses the full range of available colors for the default
1507 faces when running on a color terminal, including 16-, 88-, and
1508 256-color xterms. This means that when you run "emacs -nw" on an
1509 88-color or 256-color xterm, you will see essentially the same face
1510 colors as on X.
1511
1512 ---
1513 *** There's a new support for colors on `rxvt' terminal emulator.
1514
1515 +++
1516 ** Emacs can now be invoked in full-screen mode on a windowed display.
1517
1518 When Emacs is invoked on a window system, the new command-line options
1519 `--fullwidth', `--fullheight', and `--fullscreen' produce a frame
1520 whose width, height, or both width and height take up the entire
1521 screen size. (For now, this does not work with some window managers.)
1522
1523 ---
1524 ** Emacs now tries to set up buffer coding systems for HTML/XML files
1525 automatically.
1526
1527 +++
1528 ** The new command `comint-insert-previous-argument' in comint-derived
1529 modes (shell-mode etc) inserts arguments from previous command lines,
1530 like bash's `ESC .' binding. It is bound by default to `C-c .', but
1531 otherwise behaves quite similarly to the bash version.
1532
1533 +++
1534 ** Changes in C-h bindings:
1535
1536 C-h e displays the *Messages* buffer.
1537
1538 C-h followed by a control character is used for displaying files
1539 that do not change:
1540
1541 C-h C-f displays the FAQ.
1542 C-h C-e displays the PROBLEMS file.
1543
1544 The info-search bindings on C-h C-f, C-h C-k and C-h C-i
1545 have been moved to C-h F, C-h K and C-h S.
1546
1547 C-h c, C-h k, C-h w, and C-h f now handle remapped interactive commands.
1548
1549 - C-h c and C-h k report the actual command (after possible remapping)
1550 run by the key sequence.
1551
1552 - C-h w and C-h f on a command which has been remapped now report the
1553 command it is remapped to, and the keys which can be used to run
1554 that command.
1555
1556 For example, if C-k is bound to kill-line, and kill-line is remapped
1557 to new-kill-line, these commands now report:
1558
1559 - C-h c and C-h k C-k reports:
1560 C-k runs the command new-kill-line
1561
1562 - C-h w and C-h f kill-line reports:
1563 kill-line is remapped to new-kill-line which is on C-k, <deleteline>
1564
1565 - C-h w and C-h f new-kill-line reports:
1566 new-kill-line is on C-k
1567
1568 +++
1569 ** Vertical scrolling is now possible within incremental search.
1570 To enable this feature, customize the new user option
1571 `isearch-allow-scroll'. User written commands which satisfy stringent
1572 constraints can be marked as "scrolling commands". See the Emacs manual
1573 for details.
1574
1575 +++
1576 ** C-w in incremental search now grabs either a character or a word,
1577 making the decision in a heuristic way. This new job is done by the
1578 command `isearch-yank-word-or-char'. To restore the old behavior,
1579 bind C-w to `isearch-yank-word' in `isearch-mode-map'.
1580
1581 +++
1582 ** C-y in incremental search now grabs the next line if point is already
1583 at the end of a line.
1584
1585 +++
1586 ** C-M-w deletes and C-M-y grabs a character in isearch mode.
1587 Another method to grab a character is to enter the minibuffer by `M-e'
1588 and to type `C-f' at the end of the search string in the minibuffer.
1589
1590 +++
1591 ** M-% typed in isearch mode invokes `query-replace' or
1592 `query-replace-regexp' (depending on search mode) with the current
1593 search string used as the string to replace.
1594
1595 +++
1596 ** Isearch no longer adds `isearch-resume' commands to the command
1597 history by default. To enable this feature, customize the new
1598 user option `isearch-resume-in-command-history'.
1599
1600 +++
1601 ** New user option `history-delete-duplicates'.
1602 If set to t when adding a new history element, all previous identical
1603 elements are deleted.
1604
1605 +++
1606 ** Yanking text now discards certain text properties that can
1607 be inconvenient when you did not expect them. The variable
1608 `yank-excluded-properties' specifies which ones. Insertion
1609 of register contents and rectangles also discards these properties.
1610
1611 +++
1612 ** Occur, Info, and comint-derived modes now support using
1613 M-x font-lock-mode to toggle fontification. The variable
1614 `Info-fontify' is no longer applicable; to disable fontification,
1615 remove `turn-on-font-lock' from `Info-mode-hook'.
1616
1617 +++
1618 ** M-x grep now tries to avoid appending `/dev/null' to the command line
1619 by using GNU grep `-H' option instead. M-x grep automatically
1620 detects whether this is possible or not the first time it is invoked.
1621 When `-H' is used, the grep command line supplied by the user is passed
1622 unchanged to the system to execute, which allows more complicated
1623 command lines to be used than was possible before.
1624
1625 ---
1626 ** The face-customization widget has been reworked to be less confusing.
1627 In particular, when you enable a face attribute using the corresponding
1628 check-box, there's no longer a redundant `*' option in value selection
1629 for that attribute; the values you can choose are only those which make
1630 sense for the attribute. When an attribute is de-selected by unchecking
1631 its check-box, then the (now ignored, but still present temporarily in
1632 case you re-select the attribute) value is hidden.
1633
1634 +++
1635 ** When you set or reset a variable's value in a Customize buffer,
1636 the previous value becomes the "backup value" of the variable.
1637 You can go back to that backup value by selecting "Use Backup Value"
1638 under the "[State]" button.
1639
1640 ---
1641 ** The new customization type `float' specifies numbers with floating
1642 point (no integers are allowed).
1643
1644 +++
1645 ** In GUD mode, when talking to GDB, C-x C-a C-j "jumps" the program
1646 counter to the specified source line (the one where point is).
1647
1648 ---
1649 ** GUD mode improvements for jdb:
1650
1651 *** Search for source files using jdb classpath and class
1652 information. Fast startup since there is no need to scan all
1653 source files up front. There is also no need to create and maintain
1654 lists of source directories to scan. Look at `gud-jdb-use-classpath'
1655 and `gud-jdb-classpath' customization variables documentation.
1656
1657 *** Supports the standard breakpoint (gud-break, gud-clear)
1658 set/clear operations from java source files under the classpath, stack
1659 traversal (gud-up, gud-down), and run until current stack finish
1660 (gud-finish).
1661
1662 *** Supports new jdb (Java 1.2 and later) in addition to oldjdb
1663 (Java 1.1 jdb).
1664
1665 *** The previous method of searching for source files has been
1666 preserved in case someone still wants/needs to use it.
1667 Set gud-jdb-use-classpath to nil.
1668
1669 Added Customization Variables
1670
1671 *** gud-jdb-command-name. What command line to use to invoke jdb.
1672
1673 *** gud-jdb-use-classpath. Allows selection of java source file searching
1674 method: set to t for new method, nil to scan gud-jdb-directories for
1675 java sources (previous method).
1676
1677 *** gud-jdb-directories. List of directories to scan and search for java
1678 classes using the original gud-jdb method (if gud-jdb-use-classpath
1679 is nil).
1680
1681 Minor Improvements
1682
1683 *** The STARTTLS elisp wrapper (starttls.el) can now use GNUTLS
1684 instead of the OpenSSL based "starttls" tool. For backwards
1685 compatibility, it prefers "starttls", but you can toggle
1686 `starttls-use-gnutls' to switch to GNUTLS (or simply remove the
1687 "starttls" tool).
1688
1689 *** Do not allow debugger output history variable to grow without bounds.
1690
1691 +++
1692 ** hide-ifdef-mode now uses overlays rather than selective-display
1693 to hide its text. This should be mostly transparent but slightly
1694 changes the behavior of motion commands like C-e and C-p.
1695
1696 +++
1697 ** Unquoted `$' in file names do not signal an error any more when
1698 the corresponding environment variable does not exist.
1699 Instead, the `$ENVVAR' text is left as is, so that `$$' quoting
1700 is only rarely needed.
1701
1702 ---
1703 ** JIT-lock changes
1704 *** jit-lock can now be delayed with `jit-lock-defer-time'.
1705
1706 If this variable is non-nil, its value should be the amount of Emacs
1707 idle time in seconds to wait before starting fontification. For
1708 example, if you set `jit-lock-defer-time' to 0.25, fontification will
1709 only happen after 0.25s of idle time.
1710
1711 *** contextual refontification is now separate from stealth fontification.
1712
1713 jit-lock-defer-contextually is renamed jit-lock-contextually and
1714 jit-lock-context-time determines the delay after which contextual
1715 refontification takes place.
1716
1717 +++
1718 ** Marking commands extend the region when invoked multiple times. If
1719 you hit M-C-SPC (mark-sexp), M-@ (mark-word), M-h (mark-paragraph), or
1720 C-M-h (mark-defun) repeatedly, the marked region extends each time, so
1721 you can mark the next two sexps with M-C-SPC M-C-SPC, for example.
1722 This feature also works for mark-end-of-sentence, if you bind that to
1723 a key. It also extends the region when the mark is active in Transient
1724 Mark mode, regardless of the last command. To start a new region with
1725 one of marking commands in Transient Mark mode, you can deactivate the
1726 active region with C-g, or set the new mark with C-SPC.
1727
1728 +++
1729 ** Some commands do something special in Transient Mark mode when the
1730 mark is active--for instance, they limit their operation to the
1731 region. Even if you don't normally use Transient Mark mode, you might
1732 want to get this behavior from a particular command. There are two
1733 ways you can enable Transient Mark mode and activate the mark, for one
1734 command only.
1735
1736 One method is to type C-SPC C-SPC; this enables Transient Mark mode
1737 and sets the mark at point. The other method is to type C-u C-x C-x.
1738 This enables Transient Mark mode temporarily but does not alter the
1739 mark or the region.
1740
1741 After these commands, Transient Mark mode remains enabled until you
1742 deactivate the mark. That typically happens when you type a command
1743 that alters the buffer, but you can also deactivate the mark by typing
1744 C-g.
1745
1746 +++
1747 ** A prefix argument is no longer required to repeat a jump to a
1748 previous mark, i.e. C-u C-SPC C-SPC C-SPC ... cycles through the
1749 mark ring. Use C-u C-u C-SPC to set the mark immediately after a jump.
1750
1751 +++
1752 ** Movement commands `beginning-of-buffer', `end-of-buffer',
1753 `beginning-of-defun', `end-of-defun' do not set the mark if the mark
1754 is already active in Transient Mark mode.
1755
1756 +++
1757 ** In the *Occur* buffer, `o' switches to it in another window, and
1758 C-o displays the current line's occurrence in another window without
1759 switching to it.
1760
1761 +++
1762 ** When you specify a frame size with --geometry, the size applies to
1763 all frames you create. A position specified with --geometry only
1764 affects the initial frame.
1765
1766 +++
1767 ** M-h (mark-paragraph) now accepts a prefix arg.
1768 With positive arg, M-h marks the current and the following paragraphs;
1769 if the arg is negative, it marks the current and the preceding
1770 paragraphs.
1771
1772 +++
1773 ** The variables dired-free-space-program and dired-free-space-args
1774 have been renamed to directory-free-space-program and
1775 directory-free-space-args, and they now apply whenever Emacs puts a
1776 directory listing into a buffer.
1777
1778 ---
1779 ** mouse-wheels can now scroll a specific fraction of the window
1780 (rather than a fixed number of lines) and the scrolling is `progressive'.
1781
1782 ---
1783 ** Unexpected yanking of text due to accidental clicking on the mouse
1784 wheel button (typically mouse-2) during wheel scrolling is now avoided.
1785 This behavior can be customized via the mouse-wheel-click-event and
1786 mouse-wheel-inhibit-click-time variables.
1787
1788 +++
1789 ** The keyboard-coding-system is now automatically set based on your
1790 current locale settings if you are not using a window system. This
1791 may mean that the META key doesn't work but generates non-ASCII
1792 characters instead, depending on how the terminal (or terminal
1793 emulator) works. Use `set-keyboard-coding-system' (or customize
1794 keyboard-coding-system) if you prefer META to work (the old default)
1795 or if the locale doesn't describe the character set actually generated
1796 by the keyboard. See Info node `Single-Byte Character Support'.
1797
1798 +++
1799 ** Emacs now reads the standard abbrevs file ~/.abbrev_defs
1800 automatically at startup, if it exists. When Emacs offers to save
1801 modified buffers, it saves the abbrevs too if they have changed. It
1802 can do this either silently or asking for confirmation first,
1803 according to the value of `save-abbrevs'.
1804
1805 +++
1806 ** Display of hollow cursors now obeys the buffer-local value (if any)
1807 of `cursor-in-non-selected-windows' in the buffer that the cursor
1808 appears in.
1809
1810 +++
1811 ** The variable `cursor-in-non-selected-windows' can now be set to any
1812 of the recognized cursor types.
1813
1814 ---
1815 ** The variable `auto-save-file-name-transforms' now has a third element that
1816 controls whether or not the function `make-auto-save-file-name' will
1817 attempt to construct a unique auto-save name (e.g. for remote files).
1818
1819 +++
1820 ** There is a new calendar package, icalendar.el, that can be used to
1821 convert Emacs diary entries to/from the iCalendar format.
1822
1823 +++
1824 ** Diary sexp entries can have custom marking in the calendar.
1825 Diary sexp functions which only apply to certain days (such as
1826 `diary-block' or `diary-cyclic') now take an optional parameter MARK,
1827 which is the name of a face or a single-character string indicating
1828 how to highlight the day in the calendar display. Specifying a
1829 single-character string as @var{mark} places the character next to the
1830 day in the calendar. Specifying a face highlights the day with that
1831 face. This lets you have different colors or markings for vacations,
1832 appointments, paydays or anything else using a sexp.
1833
1834 +++
1835 ** The new function `calendar-goto-day-of-year' (g D) prompts for a
1836 year and day number, and moves to that date. Negative day numbers
1837 count backward from the end of the year.
1838
1839 +++
1840 ** The new Calendar function `calendar-goto-iso-week' (g w)
1841 prompts for a year and a week number, and moves to the first
1842 day of that ISO week.
1843
1844 ---
1845 ** The new variable `calendar-minimum-window-height' affects the
1846 window generated by the function `generate-calendar-window'.
1847
1848 ---
1849 ** The functions `holiday-easter-etc' and `holiday-advent' now take
1850 optional arguments, in order to only report on the specified holiday
1851 rather than all. This makes customization of variables such as
1852 `christian-holidays' simpler.
1853
1854 ---
1855 ** The function `simple-diary-display' now by default sets a header line.
1856 This can be controlled through the variables `diary-header-line-flag'
1857 and `diary-header-line-format'.
1858
1859 +++
1860 ** The procedure for activating appointment reminders has changed: use
1861 the new function `appt-activate'. The new variable
1862 `appt-display-format' controls how reminders are displayed, replacing
1863 appt-issue-message, appt-visible, and appt-msg-window.
1864
1865 +++
1866 ** The new functions `diary-from-outlook', `diary-from-outlook-gnus',
1867 and `diary-from-outlook-rmail' can be used to import diary entries
1868 from Outlook-format appointments in mail messages. The variable
1869 `diary-outlook-formats' can be customized to recognize additional
1870 formats.
1871
1872
1873 ** VC Changes
1874
1875 +++
1876 *** The key C-x C-q no longer checks files in or out, it only changes
1877 the read-only state of the buffer (toggle-read-only). We made this
1878 change because we held a poll and found that many users were unhappy
1879 with the previous behavior. If you do prefer this behavior, you
1880 can bind `vc-toggle-read-only' to C-x C-q in your .emacs:
1881
1882 (global-set-key "\C-x\C-q" 'vc-toggle-read-only)
1883
1884 The function `vc-toggle-read-only' will continue to exist.
1885
1886 +++
1887 *** There is a new user option `vc-cvs-global-switches' that allows
1888 you to specify switches that are passed to any CVS command invoked
1889 by VC. These switches are used as "global options" for CVS, which
1890 means they are inserted before the command name. For example, this
1891 allows you to specify a compression level using the "-z#" option for
1892 CVS.
1893
1894 +++
1895 *** New backends for Subversion and Meta-CVS.
1896
1897 ** EDiff changes.
1898
1899 +++
1900 *** When comparing directories.
1901 Typing D brings up a buffer that lists the differences between the contents of
1902 directories. Now it is possible to use this buffer to copy the missing files
1903 from one directory to another.
1904
1905 +++
1906 *** When comparing files or buffers.
1907 Typing the = key now offers to perform the word-by-word comparison of the
1908 currently highlighted regions in an inferior Ediff session. If you answer 'n'
1909 then it reverts to the old behavior and asks the user to select regions for
1910 comparison.
1911
1912 *** The new command `ediff-backup' compares a file with its most recent
1913 backup using `ediff'. If you specify the name of a backup file,
1914 `ediff-backup' compares it with the file of which it is a backup.
1915
1916 +++
1917 ** Etags changes.
1918
1919 *** New regular expressions features
1920
1921 **** New syntax for regular expressions, multi-line regular expressions.
1922 The syntax --ignore-case-regexp=/regex/ is now undocumented and retained
1923 only for backward compatibility. The new equivalent syntax is
1924 --regex=/regex/i. More generally, it is --regex=/TAGREGEX/TAGNAME/MODS,
1925 where `/TAGNAME' is optional, as usual, and MODS is a string of 0 or
1926 more characters among `i' (ignore case), `m' (multi-line) and `s'
1927 (single-line). The `m' and `s' modifiers behave as in Perl regular
1928 expressions: `m' allows regexps to match more than one line, while `s'
1929 (which implies `m') means that `.' matches newlines. The ability to
1930 span newlines allows writing of much more powerful regular expressions
1931 and rapid prototyping for tagging new languages.
1932
1933 **** Regular expressions can use char escape sequences as in Gcc.
1934 The escaped character sequence \a, \b, \d, \e, \f, \n, \r, \t, \v,
1935 respectively, stand for the ASCII characters BEL, BS, DEL, ESC, FF, NL,
1936 CR, TAB, VT,
1937
1938 **** Regular expressions can be bound to a given language.
1939 The syntax --regex={LANGUAGE}REGEX means that REGEX is used to make tags
1940 only for files of language LANGUAGE, and ignored otherwise. This is
1941 particularly useful when storing regexps in a file.
1942
1943 **** Regular expressions can be read from a file.
1944 The --regex=@regexfile option means read the regexps from a file, one
1945 per line. Lines beginning with space or tab are ignored.
1946
1947 *** New language parsing features
1948
1949 **** The `::' qualifier triggers C++ parsing in C file.
1950 Previously, only the `template' and `class' keywords had this effect.
1951
1952 **** The gnucc __attribute__ keyword is now recognised and ignored.
1953
1954 **** New language HTML.
1955 Title and h1, h2, h3 are tagged. Also, tags are generated when name= is
1956 used inside an anchor and whenever id= is used.
1957
1958 **** In Makefiles, constants are tagged.
1959 If you want the old behavior instead, thus avoiding to increase the
1960 size of the tags file, use the --no-globals option.
1961
1962 **** New language Lua.
1963 All functions are tagged.
1964
1965 **** In Perl, packages are tags.
1966 Subroutine tags are named from their package. You can jump to sub tags
1967 as you did before, by the sub name, or additionally by looking for
1968 package::sub.
1969
1970 **** In Prolog, etags creates tags for rules in addition to predicates.
1971
1972 **** New language PHP.
1973 Tags are functions, classes and defines.
1974 If the --members option is specified to etags, tags are variables also.
1975
1976 **** New default keywords for TeX.
1977 The new keywords are def, newcommand, renewcommand, newenvironment and
1978 renewenvironment.
1979
1980 *** Honour #line directives.
1981 When Etags parses an input file that contains C preprocessor's #line
1982 directives, it creates tags using the file name and line number
1983 specified in those directives. This is useful when dealing with code
1984 created from Cweb source files. When Etags tags the generated file, it
1985 writes tags pointing to the source file.
1986
1987 *** New option --parse-stdin=FILE.
1988 This option is mostly useful when calling etags from programs. It can
1989 be used (only once) in place of a file name on the command line. Etags
1990 reads from standard input and marks the produced tags as belonging to
1991 the file FILE.
1992
1993 +++
1994 ** CC Mode changes.
1995
1996 *** Font lock support.
1997 CC Mode now provides font lock support for all its languages. This
1998 supersedes the font lock patterns that have been in the core font lock
1999 package for C, C++, Java and Objective-C. Like indentation, font
2000 locking is done in a uniform way across all languages (except the new
2001 AWK mode - see below). That means that the new font locking will be
2002 different from the old patterns in various details for most languages.
2003
2004 The main goal of the font locking in CC Mode is accuracy, to provide a
2005 dependable aid in recognizing the various constructs. Some, like
2006 strings and comments, are easy to recognize while others like
2007 declarations and types can be very tricky. CC Mode can go to great
2008 lengths to recognize declarations and casts correctly, especially when
2009 the types aren't recognized by standard patterns. This is a fairly
2010 demanding analysis which can be slow on older hardware, and it can
2011 therefore be disabled by choosing a lower decoration level with the
2012 variable font-lock-maximum-decoration.
2013
2014 Note that the most demanding font lock level has been tuned with lazy
2015 fontification in mind, i.e. there should be a support mode that waits
2016 with the fontification until the text is actually shown
2017 (e.g. Just-in-time Lock mode, which is the default, or Lazy Lock
2018 mode). Fontifying a file with several thousand lines in one go can
2019 take the better part of a minute.
2020
2021 **** The (c|c++|objc|java|idl|pike)-font-lock-extra-types variables
2022 are now used by CC Mode to recognize identifiers that are certain to
2023 be types. (They are also used in cases that aren't related to font
2024 locking.) At the maximum decoration level, types are often recognized
2025 properly anyway, so these variables should be fairly restrictive and
2026 not contain patterns for uncertain types.
2027
2028 **** Support for documentation comments.
2029 There is a "plugin" system to fontify documentation comments like
2030 Javadoc and the markup within them. It's independent of the host
2031 language, so it's possible to e.g. turn on Javadoc font locking in C
2032 buffers. See the variable c-doc-comment-style for details.
2033
2034 Currently two kinds of doc comment styles are recognized: Suns Javadoc
2035 and Autodoc which is used in Pike. This is by no means a complete
2036 list of the most common tools; if your doc comment extractor of choice
2037 is missing then please drop a note to bug-cc-mode@gnu.org.
2038
2039 **** Better handling of C++ templates.
2040 As a side effect of the more accurate font locking, C++ templates are
2041 now handled much better. The angle brackets that delimit them are
2042 given parenthesis syntax so that they can be navigated like other
2043 parens.
2044
2045 This also improves indentation of templates, although there still is
2046 work to be done in that area. E.g. it's required that multiline
2047 template clauses are written in full and then refontified to be
2048 recognized, and the indentation of nested templates is a bit odd and
2049 not as configurable as it ought to be.
2050
2051 **** Improved handling of Objective-C and CORBA IDL.
2052 Especially the support for Objective-C and IDL has gotten an overhaul.
2053 The special "@" declarations in Objective-C are handled correctly.
2054 All the keywords used in CORBA IDL, PSDL, and CIDL are recognized and
2055 handled correctly, also wrt indentation.
2056
2057 *** Support for the AWK language.
2058 Support for the AWK language has been introduced. The implementation is
2059 based around GNU AWK version 3.1, but it should work pretty well with
2060 any AWK. As yet, not all features of CC Mode have been adapted for AWK.
2061 Here is a summary:
2062
2063 **** Indentation Engine
2064 The CC Mode indentation engine fully supports AWK mode.
2065
2066 AWK mode handles code formatted in the conventional AWK fashion: `{'s
2067 which start actions, user-defined functions, or compound statements are
2068 placed on the same line as the associated construct; the matching `}'s
2069 are normally placed under the start of the respective pattern, function
2070 definition, or structured statement.
2071
2072 The predefined indentation functions haven't yet been adapted for AWK
2073 mode, though some of them may work serendipitously. There shouldn't be
2074 any problems writing custom indentation functions for AWK mode.
2075
2076 The command C-c C-q (c-indent-defun) hasn't yet been adapted for AWK,
2077 though in practice it works properly nearly all the time. Should it
2078 fail, explicitly set the region around the function (using C-u C-SPC:
2079 C-M-h probably won't work either) then do C-M-\ (indent-region).
2080
2081 **** Font Locking
2082 There is a single level of font locking in AWK mode, rather than the
2083 three distinct levels the other modes have. There are several
2084 idiosyncrasies in AWK mode's font-locking due to the peculiarities of
2085 the AWK language itself.
2086
2087 **** Comment Commands
2088 M-; (indent-for-comment) works fine. None of the other CC Mode
2089 comment formatting commands have yet been adapted for AWK mode.
2090
2091 **** Movement Commands
2092 Most of the movement commands work in AWK mode. The most important
2093 exceptions are M-a (c-beginning-of-statement) and M-e
2094 (c-end-of-statement) which haven't yet been adapted.
2095
2096 The notion of "defun" has been augmented to include AWK pattern-action
2097 pairs. C-M-a (c-awk-beginning-of-defun) and C-M-e (c-awk-end-of-defun)
2098 recognise these pattern-action pairs, as well as user defined
2099 functions.
2100
2101 **** Auto-newline Insertion and Clean-ups
2102 Auto-newline insertion hasn't yet been adapted for AWK. Some of
2103 the clean-ups can actually convert good AWK code into syntactically
2104 invalid code. These features are best disabled in AWK buffers.
2105
2106 *** New syntactic symbols in IDL mode.
2107 The top level constructs "module" and "composition" (from CIDL) are
2108 now handled like "namespace" in C++: They are given syntactic symbols
2109 module-open, module-close, inmodule, composition-open,
2110 composition-close, and incomposition.
2111
2112 *** New functions to do hungry delete without enabling hungry delete mode.
2113 The functions c-hungry-backspace and c-hungry-delete-forward can be
2114 bound to keys to get this feature without toggling a mode.
2115 Contributed by Kevin Ryde.
2116
2117 *** Better control over require-final-newline. The variable that
2118 controls how to handle a final newline when the buffer is saved,
2119 require-final-newline, is now customizable on a per-mode basis through
2120 c-require-final-newline. That is a list of modes, and only those
2121 modes set require-final-newline. By default that's C, C++ and
2122 Objective-C.
2123
2124 The specified modes set require-final-newline based on
2125 mode-require-final-newline, as usual.
2126
2127 *** Format change for syntactic context elements.
2128 The elements in the syntactic context returned by c-guess-basic-syntax
2129 and stored in c-syntactic-context has been changed somewhat to allow
2130 attaching more information. They are now lists instead of single cons
2131 cells. E.g. a line that previously had the syntactic analysis
2132
2133 ((inclass . 11) (topmost-intro . 13))
2134
2135 is now analysed as
2136
2137 ((inclass 11) (topmost-intro 13))
2138
2139 In some cases there are more than one position given for a syntactic
2140 symbol.
2141
2142 This change might affect code that call c-guess-basic-syntax directly,
2143 and custom lineup functions if they use c-syntactic-context. However,
2144 the argument given to lineup functions is still a single cons cell
2145 with nil or an integer in the cdr.
2146
2147 *** API changes for derived modes.
2148 There have been extensive changes "under the hood" which can affect
2149 derived mode writers. Some of these changes are likely to cause
2150 incompatibilities with existing derived modes, but on the other hand
2151 care has now been taken to make it possible to extend and modify CC
2152 Mode with less risk of such problems in the future.
2153
2154 **** New language variable system.
2155 See the comment blurb near the top of cc-langs.el.
2156
2157 **** New initialization functions.
2158 The initialization procedure has been split up into more functions to
2159 give better control: c-basic-common-init, c-font-lock-init, and
2160 c-init-language-vars.
2161
2162 *** Changes in analysis of nested syntactic constructs.
2163 The syntactic analysis engine has better handling of cases where
2164 several syntactic constructs appear nested on the same line. They are
2165 now handled as if each construct started on a line of its own.
2166
2167 This means that CC Mode now indents some cases differently, and
2168 although it's more consistent there might be cases where the old way
2169 gave results that's more to one's liking. So if you find a situation
2170 where you think that the indentation has become worse, please report
2171 it to bug-cc-mode@gnu.org.
2172
2173 **** New syntactic symbol substatement-label.
2174 This symbol is used when a label is inserted between a statement and
2175 its substatement. E.g:
2176
2177 if (x)
2178 x_is_true:
2179 do_stuff();
2180
2181 *** Better handling of multiline macros.
2182
2183 **** Syntactic indentation inside macros.
2184 The contents of multiline #define's are now analyzed and indented
2185 syntactically just like other code. This can be disabled by the new
2186 variable c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros. A new syntactic symbol
2187 cpp-define-intro has been added to control the initial indentation
2188 inside #define's.
2189
2190 **** New lineup function c-lineup-cpp-define.
2191 Now used by default to line up macro continuation lines. The behavior
2192 of this function closely mimics the indentation one gets if the macro
2193 is indented while the line continuation backslashes are temporarily
2194 removed. If syntactic indentation in macros is turned off, it works
2195 much line c-lineup-dont-change, which was used earlier, but handles
2196 empty lines within the macro better.
2197
2198 **** Automatically inserted newlines continues the macro if used within one.
2199 This applies to the newlines inserted by the auto-newline mode, and to
2200 c-context-line-break and c-context-open-line.
2201
2202 **** Better alignment of line continuation backslashes.
2203 c-backslash-region tries to adapt to surrounding backslashes. New
2204 variable c-backslash-max-column which put a limit on how far out
2205 backslashes can be moved.
2206
2207 **** Automatic alignment of line continuation backslashes.
2208 This is controlled by the new variable c-auto-align-backslashes. It
2209 affects c-context-line-break, c-context-open-line and newlines
2210 inserted in auto-newline mode.
2211
2212 **** Line indentation works better inside macros.
2213 Regardless whether syntactic indentation and syntactic indentation
2214 inside macros are enabled or not, line indentation now ignores the
2215 line continuation backslashes. This is most noticeable when syntactic
2216 indentation is turned off and there are empty lines (save for the
2217 backslash) in the macro.
2218
2219 *** indent-for-comment is more customizable.
2220 The behavior of M-; (indent-for-comment) is now configurable through
2221 the variable c-indent-comment-alist. The indentation behavior based
2222 on the preceding code on the line, e.g. to get two spaces after #else
2223 and #endif but indentation to comment-column in most other cases
2224 (something which was hardcoded earlier).
2225
2226 *** New function c-context-open-line.
2227 It's the open-line equivalent of c-context-line-break.
2228
2229 *** New lineup functions
2230
2231 **** c-lineup-string-cont
2232 This lineup function lines up a continued string under the one it
2233 continues. E.g:
2234
2235 result = prefix + "A message "
2236 "string."; <- c-lineup-string-cont
2237
2238 **** c-lineup-cascaded-calls
2239 Lines up series of calls separated by "->" or ".".
2240
2241 **** c-lineup-knr-region-comment
2242 Gives (what most people think is) better indentation of comments in
2243 the "K&R region" between the function header and its body.
2244
2245 **** c-lineup-gcc-asm-reg
2246 Provides better indentation inside asm blocks. Contributed by Kevin
2247 Ryde.
2248
2249 **** c-lineup-argcont
2250 Lines up continued function arguments after the preceding comma.
2251 Contributed by Kevin Ryde.
2252
2253 *** Better caching of the syntactic context.
2254 CC Mode caches the positions of the opening parentheses (of any kind)
2255 of the lists surrounding the point. Those positions are used in many
2256 places as anchor points for various searches. The cache is now
2257 improved so that it can be reused to a large extent when the point is
2258 moved. The less it moves, the less needs to be recalculated.
2259
2260 The effect is that CC Mode should be fast most of the time even when
2261 opening parens are hung (i.e. aren't in column zero). It's typically
2262 only the first time after the point is moved far down in a complex
2263 file that it'll take noticeable time to find out the syntactic
2264 context.
2265
2266 *** Statements are recognized in a more robust way.
2267 Statements are recognized most of the time even when they occur in an
2268 "invalid" context, e.g. in a function argument. In practice that can
2269 happen when macros are involved.
2270
2271 *** Improved the way c-indent-exp chooses the block to indent.
2272 It now indents the block for the closest sexp following the point
2273 whose closing paren ends on a different line. This means that the
2274 point doesn't have to be immediately before the block to indent.
2275 Also, only the block and the closing line is indented; the current
2276 line is left untouched.
2277
2278 *** Added toggle for syntactic indentation.
2279 The function c-toggle-syntactic-indentation can be used to toggle
2280 syntactic indentation.
2281
2282 +++
2283 ** The command line option --no-windows has been changed to
2284 --no-window-system. The old one still works, but is deprecated.
2285
2286 +++
2287 ** The command `list-text-properties-at' has been deleted because
2288 C-u C-x = gives the same information and more.
2289
2290 +++
2291 ** `buffer-menu' and `list-buffers' now list buffers whose names begin
2292 with a space, when those buffers are visiting files. Normally buffers
2293 whose names begin with space are omitted.
2294
2295 +++
2296 ** You can now customize fill-nobreak-predicate to control where
2297 filling can break lines. The value is now normally a list of
2298 functions, but it can also be a single function, for compatibility.
2299
2300 We provide two sample predicates, fill-single-word-nobreak-p and
2301 fill-french-nobreak-p, for use in the value of fill-nobreak-predicate.
2302
2303 +++
2304 ** New user option `add-log-always-start-new-record'.
2305 When this option is enabled, M-x add-change-log-entry always
2306 starts a new record regardless of when the last record is.
2307
2308 +++
2309 ** SGML mode has indentation and supports XML syntax.
2310 The new variable `sgml-xml-mode' tells SGML mode to use XML syntax.
2311 When this option is enabled, SGML tags are inserted in XML style,
2312 i.e., there is always a closing tag.
2313 By default, its setting is inferred on a buffer-by-buffer basis
2314 from the file name or buffer contents.
2315
2316 +++
2317 ** `xml-mode' is now an alias for `sgml-mode', which has XML support.
2318
2319 ---
2320 ** Lisp mode now uses font-lock-doc-face for the docstrings.
2321
2322 ---
2323 ** Perl mode has a new variable `perl-indent-continued-arguments'.
2324
2325 ---
2326 ** Fortran mode does more font-locking by default. Use level 3
2327 highlighting for the old default.
2328
2329 +++
2330 ** Fortran mode has a new variable `fortran-directive-re'.
2331 Adapt this to match the format of any compiler directives you use.
2332 Lines that match are never indented, and are given distinctive font-locking.
2333
2334 +++
2335 ** F90 mode and Fortran mode have new navigation commands
2336 `f90-end-of-block', `f90-beginning-of-block', `f90-next-block',
2337 `f90-previous-block', `fortran-end-of-block',
2338 `fortran-beginning-of-block'.
2339
2340 ---
2341 ** F90 mode and Fortran mode have support for hs-minor-mode (hideshow).
2342 It cannot deal with every code format, but ought to handle a sizeable
2343 majority.
2344
2345 ---
2346 ** The new function `f90-backslash-not-special' can be used to change
2347 the syntax of backslashes in F90 buffers.
2348
2349 ---
2350 ** Prolog mode has a new variable `prolog-font-lock-keywords'
2351 to support use of font-lock.
2352
2353 +++
2354 ** `special-display-buffer-names' and `special-display-regexps' now
2355 understand two new boolean pseudo-frame-parameters `same-frame' and
2356 `same-window'.
2357
2358 +++
2359 ** M-x setenv now expands environment variables of the form `$foo' and
2360 `${foo}' in the specified new value of the environment variable. To
2361 include a `$' in the value, use `$$'.
2362
2363 +++
2364 ** File-name completion can now ignore directories.
2365 If an element of the list in `completion-ignored-extensions' ends in a
2366 slash `/', it indicates a subdirectory that should be ignored when
2367 completing file names. Elements of `completion-ignored-extensions'
2368 which do not end in a slash are never considered when a completion
2369 candidate is a directory.
2370
2371 +++
2372 ** The completion commands TAB, SPC and ? in the minibuffer apply only
2373 to the text before point. If there is text in the buffer after point,
2374 it remains unchanged.
2375
2376 ---
2377 ** Enhanced visual feedback in *Completions* buffer.
2378
2379 Completions lists use faces to highlight what all completions
2380 have in common and where they begin to differ.
2381
2382 The common prefix shared by all possible completions uses the face
2383 `completions-common-part', while the first character that isn't the
2384 same uses the face `completions-first-difference'. By default,
2385 `completions-common-part' inherits from `default', and
2386 `completions-first-difference' inherits from `bold'. The idea of
2387 `completions-common-part' is that you can use it to make the common
2388 parts less visible than normal, so that the rest of the differing
2389 parts is, by contrast, slightly highlighted.
2390
2391 +++
2392 ** New user option `inhibit-startup-buffer-menu'.
2393 When loading many files, for instance with `emacs *', Emacs normally
2394 displays a buffer menu. This option turns the buffer menu off.
2395
2396 ---
2397 ** Rmail now displays 5-digit message ids in its summary buffer.
2398
2399 +++
2400 ** Support for `movemail' from GNU mailutils was added to Rmail.
2401 This version of `movemail' allows to read mail from a wide range of
2402 mailbox formats, including remote POP3 and IMAP4 mailboxes with or
2403 without TLS encryption. If GNU mailutils is installed on the system
2404 and its version of `movemail' can be found in exec-path, it will be
2405 used instead of the native one.
2406
2407 ---
2408 ** On MS Windows, the "system caret" now follows the cursor.
2409 This enables Emacs to work better with programs that need to track
2410 the cursor, for example screen magnifiers and text to speech programs.
2411
2412 ---
2413 ** Tooltips now work on MS Windows.
2414 See the Emacs 21.1 NEWS entry for tooltips for details.
2415
2416 ---
2417 ** Images are now supported on MS Windows.
2418 PBM and XBM images are supported out of the box. Other image formats
2419 depend on external libraries. All of these libraries have been ported
2420 to Windows, and can be found in both source and binary form at
2421 http://gnuwin32.sourceforge.net/. Note that libpng also depends on
2422 zlib, and tiff depends on the version of jpeg that it was compiled
2423 against. For additional information, see nt/INSTALL.
2424
2425 ---
2426 ** Sound is now supported on MS Windows.
2427 WAV format is supported on all versions of Windows, other formats such
2428 as AU, AIFF and MP3 may be supported in the more recent versions of
2429 Windows, or when other software provides hooks into the system level
2430 sound support for those formats.
2431
2432 ---
2433 ** Different shaped mouse pointers are supported on MS Windows.
2434 The mouse pointer changes shape depending on what is under the pointer.
2435
2436 ---
2437 ** Pointing devices with more than 3 buttons are now supported on MS Windows.
2438 The new variable `w32-pass-extra-mouse-buttons-to-system' controls
2439 whether Emacs should handle the extra buttons itself (the default), or
2440 pass them to Windows to be handled with system-wide functions.
2441
2442 ---
2443 ** Emacs takes note of colors defined in Control Panel on MS-Windows.
2444 The Control Panel defines some default colors for applications in much
2445 the same way as wildcard X Resources do on X. Emacs now adds these
2446 colors to the colormap prefixed by System (eg SystemMenu for the
2447 default Menu background, SystemMenuText for the foreground), and uses
2448 some of them to initialize some of the default faces.
2449 `list-colors-display' shows the list of System color names, in case
2450 you wish to use them in other faces.
2451
2452 ---
2453 ** On MS Windows NT/W2K/XP, Emacs uses Unicode for clipboard operations.
2454 Those systems use Unicode internally, so this allows Emacs to share
2455 multilingual text with other applications. On other versions of
2456 MS Windows, Emacs now uses the appropriate locale coding-system, so
2457 the clipboard should work correctly for your local language without
2458 any customizations.
2459
2460 +++
2461 ** Under X11, it is possible to swap Alt and Meta (and Super and Hyper).
2462 The new variables `x-alt-keysym', `x-hyper-keysym', `x-meta-keysym',
2463 and `x-super-keysym' can be used to choose which keysyms Emacs should
2464 use for the modifiers. For example, the following two lines swap
2465 Meta and Alt:
2466 (setq x-alt-keysym 'meta)
2467 (setq x-meta-keysym 'alt)
2468
2469 +++
2470 ** vc-annotate-mode enhancements
2471
2472 In vc-annotate mode, you can now use the following key bindings for
2473 enhanced functionality to browse the annotations of past revisions, or
2474 to view diffs or log entries directly from vc-annotate-mode:
2475
2476 P: annotates the previous revision
2477 N: annotates the next revision
2478 J: annotates the revision at line
2479 A: annotates the revision previous to line
2480 D: shows the diff of the revision at line with its previous revision
2481 L: shows the log of the revision at line
2482 W: annotates the workfile (most up to date) version
2483
2484 +++
2485 ** In pcl-cvs mode, there is a new `d y' command to view the diffs
2486 between the local version of the file and yesterday's head revision
2487 in the repository.
2488
2489 +++
2490 ** In pcl-cvs mode, there is a new `d r' command to view the changes
2491 anyone has committed to the repository since you last executed
2492 "checkout", "update" or "commit". That means using cvs diff options
2493 -rBASE -rHEAD.
2494
2495 ---
2496 ** New variable `hs-set-up-overlay' allows customization of the overlay 2407 ** New variable `hs-set-up-overlay' allows customization of the overlay
2497 used to effect hiding for hideshow minor mode. Integration with isearch 2408 used to effect hiding for hideshow minor mode. Integration with isearch
2498 handles the overlay property `display' specially, preserving it during 2409 handles the overlay property `display' specially, preserving it during
2499 temporary overlay showing in the course of an isearch operation. 2410 temporary overlay showing in the course of an isearch operation.
2500 2411
2501 +++ 2412 +++
2502 ** New command `recode-region' decodes the region again by a specified 2413 ** hide-ifdef-mode now uses overlays rather than selective-display
2503 coding system. 2414 to hide its text. This should be mostly transparent but slightly
2504 2415 changes the behavior of motion commands like C-e and C-p.
2505 --- 2416
2506 ** On Mac OS, the value of the variable `keyboard-coding-system' is 2417 ---
2507 now dynamically changed according to the current keyboard script. The 2418 ** partial-completion-mode now does partial completion on directory names.
2508 variable `mac-keyboard-text-encoding' and the constants 2419
2509 `kTextEncodingMacRoman', `kTextEncodingISOLatin1', and 2420 ---
2510 `kTextEncodingISOLatin2' are obsolete. 2421 ** The type-break package now allows `type-break-file-name' to be nil
2422 and if so, doesn't store any data across sessions. This is handy if
2423 you don't want the .type-break file in your home directory or are
2424 annoyed by the need for interaction when you kill Emacs.
2425
2426 ---
2427 ** `ps-print' can now print characters from the mule-unicode charsets.
2428
2429 Printing text with characters from the mule-unicode-* sets works with
2430 ps-print, provided that you have installed the appropriate BDF fonts.
2431 See the file INSTALL for URLs where you can find these fonts.
2432
2433 ---
2434 ** New command `strokes-global-set-stroke-string'.
2435 This is like `strokes-global-set-stroke', but it allows you to bind
2436 the stroke directly to a string to insert. This is convenient for
2437 using strokes as an input method.
2438
2439 ---
2440 ** LDAP support now defaults to ldapsearch from OpenLDAP version 2.
2441
2442 +++
2443 ** You can now disable pc-selection-mode after enabling it.
2444 M-x pc-selection-mode behaves like a proper minor mode, and with no
2445 argument it toggles the mode.
2446
2447 Turning off PC-Selection mode restores the global key bindings
2448 that were replaced by turning on the mode.
2449
2450 ---
2451 ** `uniquify-strip-common-suffix' tells uniquify to prefer
2452 `file|dir1' and `file|dir2' to `file|dir1/subdir' and `file|dir2/subdir'.
2453
2454 ---
2455 ** rx.el has new corresponding `symbol-end' and `symbol-start' elements.
2456
2457 ---
2458 ** Support for `magic cookie' standout modes has been removed.
2459 Emacs will still work on terminals that require magic cookies in order
2460 to use standout mode, however they will not be able to display
2461 mode-lines in inverse-video.
2462
2463 ---
2464 ** The game `mpuz' is enhanced.
2465
2466 `mpuz' now allows the 2nd factor not to have two identical digits. By
2467 default, all trivial operations involving whole lines are performed
2468 automatically. The game uses faces for better visual feedback.
2469
2470 ---
2471 ** display-battery has been replaced by display-battery-mode.
2472
2473 ---
2474 ** calculator.el now has radix grouping mode, which is available when
2475 `calculator-output-radix' is non-nil. In this mode a separator
2476 character is used every few digits, making it easier to see byte
2477 boundries etc. For more info, see the documentation of the variable
2478 `calculator-radix-grouping-mode'.
2479
2480 ---
2481 ** global-whitespace-mode is a new alias for whitespace-global-mode.
2482
2483 +++
2484 ** The command `list-text-properties-at' has been deleted because
2485 C-u C-x = gives the same information and more.
2486
2487 ---
2488 ** fast-lock.el and lazy-lock.el are obsolete. Use jit-lock.el instead.
2489
2490 ---
2491 ** iso-acc.el is now obsolete. Use one of the latin input methods instead.
2492
2493 ---
2494 ** cplus-md.el has been removed to avoid problems with Custom.
2495
2511 2496
2512 * New modes and packages in Emacs 22.1 2497 * New modes and packages in Emacs 22.1
2513 2498
2514 +++ 2499 +++
2515 ** The new package longlines.el provides a minor mode for editing text 2500 ** New package benchmark.el contains simple support for convenient
2516 files composed of long lines, based on the `use-hard-newlines' 2501 timing measurements of code (including the garbage collection component).
2517 mechanism. The long lines are broken up by inserting soft newlines, 2502
2518 which are automatically removed when saving the file to disk or 2503 +++
2519 copying into the kill ring, clipboard, etc. By default, Longlines 2504 ** Calc is now part of the Emacs distribution.
2520 mode inserts soft newlines automatically during editing, a behavior 2505
2521 referred to as "soft word wrap" in other text editors. This is 2506 Calc is an advanced desk calculator and mathematical tool written in
2522 similar to Refill mode, but more reliable. To turn the word wrap 2507 Emacs Lisp. Its documentation is in a separate manual; within Emacs,
2523 feature off, set `longlines-auto-wrap' to nil. 2508 type "C-h i m calc RET" to read that manual. A reference card is
2509 available in `etc/calccard.tex' and `etc/calccard.ps'.
2510
2511 ---
2512 ** `cfengine-mode' is a major mode for editing GNU Cfengine
2513 configuration files.
2524 2514
2525 +++ 2515 +++
2526 ** The new package conf-mode.el handles thousands of configuration files, with 2516 ** The new package conf-mode.el handles thousands of configuration files, with
2527 varying syntaxes for comments (;, #, //, /* */ or !), assignment (var = value, 2517 varying syntaxes for comments (;, #, //, /* */ or !), assignment (var = value,
2528 var : value, var value or keyword var value) and sections ([section] or 2518 var : value, var value or keyword var value) and sections ([section] or
2529 section { }). Many files under /etc/, or with suffixes like .cf through 2519 section { }). Many files under /etc/, or with suffixes like .cf through
2530 .config, .properties (Java), .desktop (KDE/Gnome), .ini and many others are 2520 .config, .properties (Java), .desktop (KDE/Gnome), .ini and many others are
2531 recognized. 2521 recognized.
2532
2533 +++
2534 ** The new package dns-mode.el add syntax highlight of DNS master files.
2535 The key binding C-c C-s (`dns-mode-soa-increment-serial') can be used
2536 to increment the SOA serial.
2537
2538 +++
2539 ** The new package flymake.el does on-the-fly syntax checking of program
2540 source files. See the Flymake's Info manual for more details.
2541
2542 ---
2543 ** The library tree-widget.el provides a new widget to display a set
2544 of hierarchical data as an outline. For example, the tree-widget is
2545 well suited to display a hierarchy of directories and files.
2546
2547 +++
2548 ** The wdired.el package allows you to use normal editing commands on Dired
2549 buffers to change filenames, permissions, etc...
2550
2551 +++
2552 ** The thumbs.el package allows you to preview image files as thumbnails
2553 and can be invoked from a Dired buffer.
2554
2555 +++
2556 ** Image files are normally visited in Image mode, which lets you toggle
2557 between viewing the image and viewing the text using C-c C-c.
2558
2559 +++
2560 ** The new python.el package is used to edit Python and Jython programs.
2561
2562 ---
2563 ** The URL package (which had been part of W3) is now part of Emacs.
2564
2565 +++
2566 ** The new global minor mode `size-indication-mode' (off by default)
2567 shows the size of accessible part of the buffer on the mode line.
2568
2569 ---
2570 ** GDB-Script-mode is used for files like .gdbinit.
2571
2572 ---
2573 ** Ido mode is now part of the Emacs distribution.
2574
2575 The ido (interactively do) package is an extension of the iswitchb
2576 package to do interactive opening of files and directories in addition
2577 to interactive buffer switching. Ido is a superset of iswitchb (with
2578 a few exceptions), so don't enable both packages.
2579 2522
2580 --- 2523 ---
2581 ** CUA mode is now part of the Emacs distribution. 2524 ** CUA mode is now part of the Emacs distribution.
2582 2525
2583 The new cua package provides CUA-like keybindings using C-x for 2526 The new cua package provides CUA-like keybindings using C-x for
2619 2562
2620 Note: This version of cua mode is not backwards compatible with older 2563 Note: This version of cua mode is not backwards compatible with older
2621 versions of cua.el and cua-mode.el. To ensure proper operation, you 2564 versions of cua.el and cua-mode.el. To ensure proper operation, you
2622 must remove older versions of cua.el or cua-mode.el as well as the 2565 must remove older versions of cua.el or cua-mode.el as well as the
2623 loading and customization of those packages from the .emacs file. 2566 loading and customization of those packages from the .emacs file.
2567
2568 +++
2569 ** The new package dns-mode.el add syntax highlight of DNS master files.
2570 The key binding C-c C-s (`dns-mode-soa-increment-serial') can be used
2571 to increment the SOA serial.
2572
2573 ---
2574 ** The new global minor mode `file-name-shadow-mode' modifies the way
2575 filenames being entered by the user in the minibuffer are displayed, so
2576 that it's clear when part of the entered filename will be ignored due to
2577 emacs' filename parsing rules. The ignored portion can be made dim,
2578 invisible, or otherwise less visually noticable. The display method may
2579 be displayed by customizing the variable `file-name-shadow-properties'.
2580
2581 +++
2582 ** The new package flymake.el does on-the-fly syntax checking of program
2583 source files. See the Flymake's Info manual for more details.
2584
2585 ---
2586 ** The new Lisp library fringe.el controls the appearance of fringes.
2587
2588 ---
2589 ** GDB-Script-mode is used for files like .gdbinit.
2590
2591 +++
2592 ** The new package gdb-ui.el provides an enhanced graphical interface to
2593 GDB. You can interact with GDB through the GUD buffer in the usual way, but
2594 there are also further buffers which control the execution and describe the
2595 state of your program. It separates the input/output of your program from
2596 that of GDB and watches expressions in the speedbar. It also uses features of
2597 Emacs 21 such as the display margin for breakpoints, and the toolbar.
2598
2599 Use M-x gdba to start GDB-UI.
2600
2601 ---
2602 ** The new package ibuffer provides a powerful, completely
2603 customizable replacement for buff-menu.el.
2604
2605 ---
2606 ** Ido mode is now part of the Emacs distribution.
2607
2608 The ido (interactively do) package is an extension of the iswitchb
2609 package to do interactive opening of files and directories in addition
2610 to interactive buffer switching. Ido is a superset of iswitchb (with
2611 a few exceptions), so don't enable both packages.
2612
2613 +++
2614 ** Image files are normally visited in Image mode, which lets you toggle
2615 between viewing the image and viewing the text using C-c C-c.
2624 2616
2625 +++ 2617 +++
2626 ** The new keypad setup package provides several common bindings for 2618 ** The new keypad setup package provides several common bindings for
2627 the numeric keypad which is available on most keyboards. The numeric 2619 the numeric keypad which is available on most keyboards. The numeric
2628 keypad typically has the digits 0 to 9, a decimal point, keys marked 2620 keypad typically has the digits 0 to 9, a decimal point, keys marked
2679 2671
2680 Keyboard macros can now be debugged and edited interactively. 2672 Keyboard macros can now be debugged and edited interactively.
2681 C-x C-k SPC steps through the last keyboard macro one key sequence 2673 C-x C-k SPC steps through the last keyboard macro one key sequence
2682 at a time, prompting for the actions to take. 2674 at a time, prompting for the actions to take.
2683 2675
2676 +++
2677 ** The new package longlines.el provides a minor mode for editing text
2678 files composed of long lines, based on the `use-hard-newlines'
2679 mechanism. The long lines are broken up by inserting soft newlines,
2680 which are automatically removed when saving the file to disk or
2681 copying into the kill ring, clipboard, etc. By default, Longlines
2682 mode inserts soft newlines automatically during editing, a behavior
2683 referred to as "soft word wrap" in other text editors. This is
2684 similar to Refill mode, but more reliable. To turn the word wrap
2685 feature off, set `longlines-auto-wrap' to nil.
2686
2684 --- 2687 ---
2685 ** The old Octave mode bindings C-c f and C-c i have been changed 2688 ** The old Octave mode bindings C-c f and C-c i have been changed
2686 to C-c C-f and C-c C-i. The C-c C-i subcommands now have duplicate 2689 to C-c C-f and C-c C-i. The C-c C-i subcommands now have duplicate
2687 bindings on control characters--thus, C-c C-i C-b is the same as 2690 bindings on control characters--thus, C-c C-i C-b is the same as
2688 C-c C-i b, and so on. 2691 C-c C-i b, and so on.
2695 ghostview, use ghostscript to print (if you don't have a PostScript 2698 ghostview, use ghostscript to print (if you don't have a PostScript
2696 printer) or send directly to printer a PostScript code generated by 2699 printer) or send directly to printer a PostScript code generated by
2697 `ps-print' package. Use M-x pr-help for more information. 2700 `ps-print' package. Use M-x pr-help for more information.
2698 2701
2699 +++ 2702 +++
2700 ** Calc is now part of the Emacs distribution. 2703 ** The new python.el package is used to edit Python and Jython programs.
2701 2704
2702 Calc is an advanced desk calculator and mathematical tool written in 2705 ---
2703 Emacs Lisp. Its documentation is in a separate manual; within Emacs, 2706 ** The minor mode Reveal mode makes text visible on the fly as you
2704 type "C-h i m calc RET" to read that manual. A reference card is 2707 move your cursor into hidden regions of the buffer.
2705 available in `etc/calccard.tex' and `etc/calccard.ps'. 2708 It should work with any package that uses overlays to hide parts
2709 of a buffer, such as outline-minor-mode, hs-minor-mode, hide-ifdef-mode, ...
2710
2711 There is also Global Reveal mode which affects all buffers.
2712
2713 ---
2714 ** The ruler-mode.el library provides a minor mode for displaying an
2715 "active" ruler in the header line. You can use the mouse to visually
2716 change the `fill-column', `window-margins' and `tab-stop-list'
2717 settings.
2718
2719 +++
2720 ** SES mode (ses-mode) is a new major mode for creating and editing
2721 spreadsheet files. Besides the usual Emacs features (intuitive command
2722 letters, undo, cell formulas in Lisp, plaintext files, etc.) it also offers
2723 viral immunity and import/export of tab-separated values.
2724
2725 +++
2726 ** The new global minor mode `size-indication-mode' (off by default)
2727 shows the size of accessible part of the buffer on the mode line.
2728
2729 +++
2730 ** The new package table.el implements editable, WYSIWYG, embedded
2731 `text tables' in Emacs buffers. It simulates the effect of putting
2732 these tables in a special major mode. The package emulates WYSIWYG
2733 table editing available in modern word processors. The package also
2734 can generate a table source in typesetting and markup languages such
2735 as latex and html from the visually laid out text table.
2736
2737 +++
2738 ** The thumbs.el package allows you to preview image files as thumbnails
2739 and can be invoked from a Dired buffer.
2706 2740
2707 +++ 2741 +++
2708 ** Tramp is now part of the distribution. 2742 ** Tramp is now part of the distribution.
2709 2743
2710 This package is similar to Ange-FTP: it allows you to edit remote 2744 This package is similar to Ange-FTP: it allows you to edit remote
2723 If you want to disable Tramp you should set 2757 If you want to disable Tramp you should set
2724 2758
2725 (setq tramp-default-method "ftp") 2759 (setq tramp-default-method "ftp")
2726 2760
2727 --- 2761 ---
2728 ** The new global minor mode `file-name-shadow-mode' modifies the way 2762 ** The library tree-widget.el provides a new widget to display a set
2729 filenames being entered by the user in the minibuffer are displayed, so 2763 of hierarchical data as an outline. For example, the tree-widget is
2730 that it's clear when part of the entered filename will be ignored due to 2764 well suited to display a hierarchy of directories and files.
2731 emacs' filename parsing rules. The ignored portion can be made dim, 2765
2732 invisible, or otherwise less visually noticable. The display method may 2766 ---
2733 be displayed by customizing the variable `file-name-shadow-properties'. 2767 ** The URL package (which had been part of W3) is now part of Emacs.
2734 2768
2735 --- 2769 ---
2736 ** The ruler-mode.el library provides a minor mode for displaying an 2770 ** New minor mode, Visible mode, toggles invisibility in the current buffer.
2737 "active" ruler in the header line. You can use the mouse to visually 2771 When enabled, it makes all invisible text visible. When disabled, it
2738 change the `fill-column', `window-margins' and `tab-stop-list' 2772 restores the previous value of `buffer-invisibility-spec'.
2739 settings. 2773
2740 2774 +++
2741 --- 2775 ** The wdired.el package allows you to use normal editing commands on Dired
2742 ** The minor mode Reveal mode makes text visible on the fly as you 2776 buffers to change filenames, permissions, etc...
2743 move your cursor into hidden regions of the buffer. 2777
2744 It should work with any package that uses overlays to hide parts
2745 of a buffer, such as outline-minor-mode, hs-minor-mode, hide-ifdef-mode, ...
2746
2747 There is also Global Reveal mode which affects all buffers.
2748
2749 ---
2750 ** The new package ibuffer provides a powerful, completely
2751 customizable replacement for buff-menu.el.
2752
2753 +++
2754 ** The new package table.el implements editable, WYSIWYG, embedded
2755 `text tables' in Emacs buffers. It simulates the effect of putting
2756 these tables in a special major mode. The package emulates WYSIWYG
2757 table editing available in modern word processors. The package also
2758 can generate a table source in typesetting and markup languages such
2759 as latex and html from the visually laid out text table.
2760
2761 +++
2762 ** SES mode (ses-mode) is a new major mode for creating and editing
2763 spreadsheet files. Besides the usual Emacs features (intuitive command
2764 letters, undo, cell formulas in Lisp, plaintext files, etc.) it also offers
2765 viral immunity and import/export of tab-separated values.
2766
2767 ---
2768 ** Support for `magic cookie' standout modes has been removed.
2769 Emacs will still work on terminals that require magic cookies in order
2770 to use standout mode, however they will not be able to display
2771 mode-lines in inverse-video.
2772
2773 ---
2774 ** cplus-md.el has been removed to avoid problems with Custom.
2775
2776 +++
2777 ** New package benchmark.el contains simple support for convenient
2778 timing measurements of code (including the garbage collection component).
2779
2780 ---
2781 ** The new Lisp library fringe.el controls the appearance of fringes.
2782
2783 ---
2784 ** `cfengine-mode' is a major mode for editing GNU Cfengine
2785 configuration files.
2786 2778
2787 * Incompatible Lisp Changes in Emacs 22.1 2779 * Incompatible Lisp Changes in Emacs 22.1
2788 2780
2789 +++ 2781 +++
2790 ** The new interactive-specification `G' reads a file name 2782 ** The new interactive-specification `G' reads a file name
2802 :propertize and :eval forms in the value of a variable whose 2794 :propertize and :eval forms in the value of a variable whose
2803 `risky-local-variable' property is nil. 2795 `risky-local-variable' property is nil.
2804 2796
2805 * Lisp Changes in Emacs 22.1 2797 * Lisp Changes in Emacs 22.1
2806 2798
2807 ** New functions, macros, and commands 2799 +++
2808 2800 ** The option --script FILE runs Emacs in batch mode and loads FILE.
2809 +++ 2801 It is useful for writing Emacs Lisp shell script files, because they
2810 *** The new function `filter-buffer-substring' extracts a buffer 2802 can start with this line:
2811 substring, passes it through a set of filter functions, and returns 2803
2812 the filtered substring. It is used instead of `buffer-substring' or 2804 #!/usr/bin/emacs --script
2813 `delete-and-extract-region' when copying text into a user-accessible 2805
2814 data structure, like the kill-ring, X clipboard, or a register. The 2806 +++
2815 list of filter function is specified by the new variable 2807 ** The option --directory DIR now modifies `load-path' immediately.
2816 `buffer-substring-filters'. For example, Longlines mode uses 2808 Directories are added to the front of `load-path' in the order they
2817 `buffer-substring-filters' to remove soft newlines from the copied 2809 appear on the command line. For example, with this command line:
2818 text. 2810
2819 2811 emacs -batch -L .. -L /tmp --eval "(require 'foo)"
2820 +++ 2812
2821 *** (while-no-input BODY...) runs BODY, but only so long as no input 2813 Emacs looks for library `foo' in the parent directory, then in /tmp, then
2822 arrives. If the user types or clicks anything, BODY stops as if a 2814 in the other directories in `load-path'. (-L is short for --directory.)
2823 quit had occurred. while-no-input returns the value of BODY, if BODY 2815
2824 finishes. It returns nil if BODY was aborted. 2816 +++
2825 2817 ** The default value of `sentence-end' is now defined using the new
2826 +++ 2818 variable `sentence-end-without-space', which contains such characters
2827 *** New function `looking-back' checks whether a regular expression matches 2819 that end a sentence without following spaces.
2828 the text before point. Specifying the LIMIT argument bounds how far 2820
2829 back the match can start; this is a way to keep it from taking too long. 2821 The function `sentence-end' should be used to obtain the value of the
2830 2822 variable `sentence-end'. If the variable `sentence-end' is nil, then
2831 +++ 2823 this function returns the regexp constructed from the variables
2832 *** New functions `make-progress-reporter', `progress-reporter-update', 2824 `sentence-end-without-period', `sentence-end-double-space' and
2833 `progress-reporter-force-update', `progress-reporter-done', and 2825 `sentence-end-without-space'.
2834 `dotimes-with-progress-reporter' provide a simple and efficient way for 2826
2835 a command to present progress messages for the user. 2827 +++
2836 2828 ** The argument to forward-word, backward-word, forward-to-indentation
2837 +++ 2829 and backward-to-indentation is now optional, and defaults to 1.
2838 *** The new primitive `get-internal-run-time' returns the processor
2839 run time used by Emacs since start-up.
2840
2841 +++
2842 *** The new function `called-interactively-p' does what many people
2843 have mistakenly believed `interactive-p' did: it returns t if the
2844 calling function was called through `call-interactively'. This should
2845 only be used when you cannot add a new "interactive" argument to the
2846 command.
2847
2848 +++
2849 *** The new function `assoc-string' replaces `assoc-ignore-case' and
2850 `assoc-ignore-representation', which are still available, but have
2851 been declared obsolete.
2852
2853 ---
2854 *** New function quail-find-key returns a list of keys to type in the
2855 current input method to input a character.
2856
2857 +++
2858 *** New functions posn-at-point and posn-at-x-y return
2859 click-event-style position information for a given visible buffer
2860 position or for a given window pixel coordinate.
2861
2862 +++
2863 *** The new primitive `set-file-times' sets a file's access and
2864 modification times. Magic file name handlers can handle this
2865 operation.
2866
2867 +++
2868 *** The new function syntax-after returns the syntax code
2869 of the character after a specified buffer position, taking account
2870 of text properties as well as the character code.
2871
2872 +++
2873 *** `syntax-class' extracts the class of a syntax code (as returned
2874 by syntax-after).
2875
2876 +++
2877 *** New function `line-number-at-pos' returns line number of current
2878 line in current buffer, or if optional buffer position is given, line
2879 number of corresponding line in current buffer.
2880
2881 +++
2882 *** New function `macroexpand-all' expands all macros in a form.
2883 It is similar to the Common-Lisp function of the same name.
2884 One difference is that it guarantees to return the original argument
2885 if no expansion is done, which may be tested using `eq'.
2886
2887 +++
2888 *** New macro with-local-quit temporarily sets inhibit-quit to nil for use
2889 around potentially blocking or long-running code in timers
2890 and post-command-hooks.
2891
2892 +++
2893 *** The new function `rassq-delete-all' deletes all elements from an
2894 alist whose cdr is `eq' to a specified value.
2895
2896 +++
2897 *** New macros define-obsolete-variable-alias to combine defvaralias and
2898 make-obsolete-variable and define-obsolete-function-alias to combine defalias
2899 and make-obsolete.
2900
2901 +++
2902 ** copy-file now takes an additional option arg MUSTBENEW.
2903
2904 This argument works like the MUSTBENEW argument of write-file.
2905
2906 ---
2907 ** easy-mmode-define-global-mode has been renamed to
2908 define-global-minor-mode. The old name remains as an alias.
2909
2910 +++
2911 ** An element of buffer-undo-list can now have the form (apply FUNNAME
2912 . ARGS), where FUNNAME is a symbol other than t or nil. That stands
2913 for a high-level change that should be undone by evaluating (apply
2914 FUNNAME ARGS).
2915
2916 These entries can also have the form (apply DELTA BEG END FUNNAME . ARGS)
2917 which indicates that the change which took place was limited to the
2918 range BEG...END and increased the buffer size by DELTA.
2919
2920 +++
2921 ** The line-move, scroll-up, and scroll-down functions will now
2922 modify the window vscroll to scroll through display rows that are
2923 taller that the height of the window, for example in the presense of
2924 large images. To disable this feature, Lisp code may bind the new
2925 variable `auto-window-vscroll' to nil.
2926
2927 +++
2928 ** If a buffer sets buffer-save-without-query to non-nil,
2929 save-some-buffers will always save that buffer without asking
2930 (if it's modified).
2931
2932 +++
2933 ** The function symbol-file tells you which file defined
2934 a certain function or variable.
2935
2936 +++
2937 ** Lisp code can now test if a given buffer position is inside a
2938 clickable link with the new function `mouse-on-link-p'. This is the
2939 function used by the new `mouse-1-click-follows-link' functionality.
2940
2941 +++
2942 ** `set-auto-mode' now gives the interpreter magic line (if present)
2943 precedence over the file name. Likewise an <?xml or <!DOCTYPE declaration
2944 will give the buffer XML or SGML mode, based on the new var
2945 `magic-mode-alist'.
2946
2947 ---
2948 ** To manipulate the File menu using easy-menu, you must specify the
2949 proper name "file". In previous Emacs versions, you had to specify
2950 "files", even though the menu item itself was changed to say "File"
2951 several versions ago.
2952
2953 +++
2954 ** read-from-minibuffer now accepts an additional argument KEEP-ALL
2955 saying to put all inputs in the history list, even empty ones.
2956
2957 +++
2958 ** The new variable search-spaces-regexp controls how to search
2959 for spaces in a regular expression. If it is non-nil, it should be a
2960 regular expression, and any series of spaces stands for that regular
2961 expression. If it is nil, spaces stand for themselves.
2962
2963 Spaces inside of constructs such as [..] and *, +, ? are never
2964 replaced with search-spaces-regexp.
2965
2966 ---
2967 ** list-buffers-noselect now takes an additional argument, BUFFER-LIST.
2968 If it is non-nil, it specifies which buffers to list.
2969
2970 ---
2971 ** set-buffer-file-coding-system now takes an additional argument,
2972 NOMODIFY. If it is non-nil, it means don't mark the buffer modified.
2973
2974 +++
2975 ** An interactive specification may now use the code letter 'U' to get
2976 the up-event that was discarded in case the last key sequence read for a
2977 previous 'k' or 'K' argument was a down-event; otherwise nil is used.
2978
2979 +++
2980 ** Function `translate-region' accepts also a char-table as TABLE
2981 argument.
2982
2983 +++
2984 ** Major mode functions now run the new normal hook
2985 `after-change-major-mode-hook', at their very end, after the mode hooks.
2986
2987 +++
2988 ** `auto-save-file-format' has been renamed to
2989 `buffer-auto-save-file-format' and made into a permanent local.
2990
2991 +++
2992 ** Both the variable and the function `disabled-command-hook' have
2993 been renamed to `disabled-command-function'. The variable
2994 `disabled-command-hook' has been kept as an obsolete alias.
2995
2996 +++
2997 ** Function `compute-motion' now calculates the usable window
2998 width if the WIDTH argument is nil. If the TOPOS argument is nil,
2999 the usable window height and width is used.
3000
3001 +++
3002 ** `visited-file-modtime' and `calendar-time-from-absolute' now return
3003 a list of two integers, instead of a cons.
3004 2830
3005 +++ 2831 +++
3006 ** If a command sets transient-mark-mode to `only', that 2832 ** If a command sets transient-mark-mode to `only', that
3007 enables Transient Mark mode for the following command only. 2833 enables Transient Mark mode for the following command only.
3008 During that following command, the value of transient-mark-mode 2834 During that following command, the value of transient-mark-mode
3009 is `identity'. If it is still `identity' at the end of the command, 2835 is `identity'. If it is still `identity' at the end of the command,
3010 it changes to nil. 2836 it changes to nil.
3011 2837
3012 +++ 2838 +++
3013 ** Cleaner way to enter key sequences.
3014
3015 You can enter a constant key sequence in a more natural format, the
3016 same one used for saving keyboard macros, using the macro `kbd'. For
3017 example,
3018
3019 (kbd "C-x C-f") => "\^x\^f"
3020
3021 +++
3022 ** The sentinel is now called when a network process is deleted with
3023 delete-process. The status message passed to the sentinel for a
3024 deleted network process is "deleted". The message passed to the
3025 sentinel when the connection is closed by the remote peer has been
3026 changed to "connection broken by remote peer".
3027
3028 +++
3029 ** If the buffer's undo list for the current command gets longer than
3030 undo-outer-limit, garbage collection empties it. This is to prevent
3031 it from using up the available memory and choking Emacs.
3032
3033 +++
3034 ** skip-chars-forward and skip-chars-backward now handle
3035 character classes such as [:alpha:], along with individual characters
3036 and ranges.
3037
3038 +++
3039 ** Function pos-visible-in-window-p now returns the pixel coordinates
3040 and partial visiblity state of the corresponding row, if the PARTIALLY
3041 arg is non-nil.
3042
3043 +++
3044 ** The function `eql' is now available without requiring the CL package.
3045
3046 +++
3047 ** The display space :width and :align-to text properties are now
3048 supported on text terminals.
3049
3050 +++
3051 ** Support for displaying image slices
3052
3053 *** New display property (slice X Y WIDTH HEIGHT) may be used with
3054 an image property to display only a specific slice of the image.
3055
3056 *** Function insert-image has new optional fourth arg to
3057 specify image slice (X Y WIDTH HEIGHT).
3058
3059 *** New function insert-sliced-image inserts a given image as a
3060 specified number of evenly sized slices (rows x columns).
3061
3062 +++
3063 ** New line-height and line-spacing properties for newline characters
3064
3065 A newline may now have line-height and line-spacing text or overlay
3066 properties that control the height of the corresponding display row.
3067
3068 If the line-height property value is t, the newline does not
3069 contribute to the height of the display row; instead the height of the
3070 newline glyph is reduced. Also, a line-spacing property on this
3071 newline is ignored. This can be used to tile small images or image
3072 slices without adding blank areas between the images.
3073
3074 If the line-height property value is a positive integer, the value
3075 specifies the minimum line height in pixels. If necessary, the line
3076 height it increased by increasing the line's ascent.
3077
3078 If the line-height property value is a float, the minimum line height
3079 is calculated by multiplying the default frame line height by the
3080 given value.
3081
3082 If the line-height property value is a cons (FACE . RATIO), the
3083 minimum line height is calculated as RATIO * height of named FACE.
3084 RATIO is int or float. If FACE is t, it specifies the current face.
3085
3086 If the line-height property value is a cons (nil . RATIO), the line
3087 height is calculated as RATIO * actual height of the line's contents.
3088
3089 If the line-height value is a cons (HEIGHT . TOTAL), HEIGHT specifies
3090 the line height as described above, while TOTAL is any of the forms
3091 described above and specifies the total height of the line, causing a
3092 varying number of pixels to be inserted after the line to make it line
3093 exactly that many pixels high.
3094
3095 If the line-spacing property value is an positive integer, the value
3096 is used as additional pixels to insert after the display line; this
3097 overrides the default frame line-spacing and any buffer local value of
3098 the line-spacing variable.
3099
3100 If the line-spacing property may be a float or cons, the line spacing
3101 is calculated as specified above for the line-height property.
3102
3103 +++
3104 ** The buffer local line-spacing variable may now have a float value,
3105 which is used as a height relative to the default frame line height.
3106
3107 +++
3108 ** Enhancements to stretch display properties
3109
3110 The display property stretch specification form `(space PROPS)', where
3111 PROPS is a property list now allows pixel based width and height
3112 specifications, as well as enhanced horizontal text alignment.
3113
3114 The value of these properties can now be a (primitive) expression
3115 which is evaluated during redisplay. The following expressions
3116 are supported:
3117
3118 EXPR ::= NUM | (NUM) | UNIT | ELEM | POS | IMAGE | FORM
3119 NUM ::= INTEGER | FLOAT | SYMBOL
3120 UNIT ::= in | mm | cm | width | height
3121 ELEM ::= left-fringe | right-fringe | left-margin | right-margin
3122 | scroll-bar | text
3123 POS ::= left | center | right
3124 FORM ::= (NUM . EXPR) | (OP EXPR ...)
3125 OP ::= + | -
3126
3127 The form `NUM' specifies a fractional width or height of the default
3128 frame font size. The form `(NUM)' specifies an absolute number of
3129 pixels. If a symbol is specified, its buffer-local variable binding
3130 is used. The `in', `mm', and `cm' units specifies the number of
3131 pixels per inch, milli-meter, and centi-meter, resp. The `width' and
3132 `height' units correspond to the width and height of the current face
3133 font. An image specification corresponds to the width or height of
3134 the image.
3135
3136 The `left-fringe', `right-fringe', `left-margin', `right-margin',
3137 `scroll-bar', and `text' elements specify to the width of the
3138 corresponding area of the window.
3139
3140 The `left', `center', and `right' positions can be used with :align-to
3141 to specify a position relative to the left edge, center, or right edge
3142 of the text area. One of the above window elements (except `text')
3143 can also be used with :align-to to specify that the position is
3144 relative to the left edge of the given area. Once the base offset for
3145 a relative position has been set (by the first occurrence of one of
3146 these symbols), further occurences of these symbols are interpreted as
3147 the width of the area.
3148
3149 For example, to align to the center of the left-margin, use
3150 :align-to (+ left-margin (0.5 . left-margin))
3151
3152 If no specific base offset is set for alignment, it is always relative
3153 to the left edge of the text area. For example, :align-to 0 in a
3154 header-line aligns with the first text column in the text area.
3155
3156 The value of the form `(NUM . EXPR)' is the value of NUM multiplied by
3157 the value of the expression EXPR. For example, (2 . in) specifies a
3158 width of 2 inches, while (0.5 . IMAGE) specifies half the width (or
3159 height) of the specified image.
3160
3161 The form `(+ EXPR ...)' adds up the value of the expressions.
3162 The form `(- EXPR ...)' negates or subtracts the value of the expressions.
3163
3164 +++
3165 ** Normally, the cursor is displayed at the end of any overlay and
3166 text property string that may be present at the current window
3167 position. The cursor may now be placed on any character of such
3168 strings by giving that character a non-nil `cursor' text property.
3169
3170 +++
3171 ** The first face specification element in a defface can specify
3172 `default' instead of frame classification. Then its attributes act as
3173 defaults that apply to all the subsequent cases (and may be overridden
3174 by them).
3175
3176 +++
3177 ** New face attribute `min-colors' can be used to tailor the face color
3178 to the number of colors supported by a display, and define the
3179 foreground and background colors accordingly so that they look best on
3180 a terminal that supports at least this many colors. This is now the
3181 preferred method for defining default faces in a way that makes a good
3182 use of the capabilities of the display.
3183
3184 +++
3185 ** Customizable fringe bitmaps
3186
3187 *** New function 'define-fringe-bitmap' can now be used to create new
3188 fringe bitmaps, as well as change the built-in fringe bitmaps.
3189
3190 To change a built-in bitmap, do (require 'fringe) and use the symbol
3191 identifing the bitmap such as `left-truncation or `continued-line'.
3192
3193 *** New function 'destroy-fringe-bitmap' may be used to destroy a
3194 previously created bitmap, or restore a built-in bitmap.
3195
3196 *** New function 'set-fringe-bitmap-face' can now be used to set a
3197 specific face to be used for a specific fringe bitmap. The face is
3198 automatically merged with the `fringe' face, so normally, the face
3199 should only specify the foreground color of the bitmap.
3200
3201 *** There are new display properties, left-fringe and right-fringe,
3202 that can be used to show a specific bitmap in the left or right fringe
3203 bitmap of the display line.
3204
3205 Format is 'display '(left-fringe BITMAP [FACE]), where BITMAP is a
3206 symbol identifying a fringe bitmap, either built-in or defined with
3207 `define-fringe-bitmap', and FACE is an optional face name to be used
3208 for displaying the bitmap instead of the default `fringe' face.
3209 When specified, FACE is automatically merged with the `fringe' face.
3210
3211 *** New function `fringe-bitmaps-at-pos' returns the current fringe
3212 bitmaps in the display line at a given buffer position.
3213
3214 +++
3215 ** Multiple overlay arrows can now be defined and managed via the new
3216 variable `overlay-arrow-variable-list'. It contains a list of
3217 varibles which contain overlay arrow position markers, including
3218 the original `overlay-arrow-position' variable.
3219
3220 Each variable on this list may have individual `overlay-arrow-string'
3221 and `overlay-arrow-bitmap' properties that specify an overlay arrow
3222 string (for non-window terminals) or fringe bitmap (for window
3223 systems) to display at the corresponding overlay arrow position.
3224 If either property is not set, the default `overlay-arrow-string' or
3225 'overlay-arrow-fringe-bitmap' will be used.
3226
3227 +++
3228 ** The default value of `sentence-end' is now defined using the new
3229 variable `sentence-end-without-space' which contains such characters
3230 that end a sentence without following spaces.
3231
3232 +++
3233 ** The function `sentence-end' should be used to obtain the value of
3234 the variable `sentence-end'. If the variable `sentence-end' is nil,
3235 then this function returns the regexp constructed from the variables
3236 `sentence-end-without-period', `sentence-end-double-space' and
3237 `sentence-end-without-space'.
3238
3239 +++
3240 ** The flags, width, and precision options for %-specifications in function
3241 `format' are now documented. Some flags that were accepted but not
3242 implemented (such as "*") are no longer accepted.
3243
3244 +++
3245 ** New function `delete-dups' destructively removes `equal' duplicates
3246 from a list. Of several `equal' occurrences of an element in the list,
3247 the first one is kept.
3248
3249 +++
3250 ** `declare' is now a macro. This change was made mostly for
3251 documentation purposes and should have no real effect on Lisp code.
3252
3253 +++
3254 ** A file name handler can declare which operations it handles.
3255
3256 You do this by putting an `operation' property on the handler name
3257 symbol. The property value should be a list of the operations that
3258 the handler really handles. It won't be called for any other
3259 operations.
3260
3261 This is useful for autoloaded handlers, to prevent them from being
3262 autoloaded when not really necessary.
3263
3264 +++
3265 ** The new hook `before-save-hook' is invoked by `basic-save-buffer' 2839 ** The new hook `before-save-hook' is invoked by `basic-save-buffer'
3266 before saving buffers. This allows packages to perform various final 2840 before saving buffers. This allows packages to perform various final
3267 tasks, for example; it can be used by the copyright package to make 2841 tasks, for example; it can be used by the copyright package to make
3268 sure saved files have the current year in any copyright headers. 2842 sure saved files have the current year in any copyright headers.
3269 2843
3270 +++ 2844 +++
3271 ** The function `insert-for-yank' now supports strings where the 2845 ** If a buffer sets buffer-save-without-query to non-nil,
3272 `yank-handler' property does not span the first character of the 2846 save-some-buffers will always save that buffer without asking
3273 string. The old behavior is available if you call 2847 (if it's modified).
3274 `insert-for-yank-1' instead. 2848
3275 2849 ---
3276 +++ 2850 ** list-buffers-noselect now takes an additional argument, BUFFER-LIST.
3277 ** New function `get-char-property-and-overlay' accepts the same 2851 If it is non-nil, it specifies which buffers to list.
3278 arguments as `get-char-property' and returns a cons whose car is the
3279 return value of `get-char-property' called with those arguments and
3280 whose cdr is the overlay in which the property was found, or nil if
3281 it was found as a text property or not found at all.
3282
3283 +++ (lispref)
3284 ??? (man)
3285 ** The mouse pointer shape in void text areas (i.e. after the end of a
3286 line or below the last line in the buffer) of the text window is now
3287 controlled by the new variable `void-text-area-pointer'. The default
3288 is to use the `arrow' (non-text) pointer. Other choices are `text'
3289 (or nil), `hand', `vdrag', `hdrag', `modeline', and `hourglass'.
3290
3291 +++
3292 ** The mouse pointer shape over an image can now be controlled by the
3293 :pointer image property.
3294
3295 +++
3296 ** The mouse pointer shape over ordinary text or images may now be
3297 controlled/overriden via the `pointer' text property.
3298
3299 +++
3300 ** Images may now have an associated image map via the :map property.
3301
3302 An image map is an alist where each element has the format (AREA ID PLIST).
3303 An AREA is specified as either a rectangle, a circle, or a polygon:
3304 A rectangle is a cons (rect . ((x0 . y0) . (x1 . y1))) specifying the
3305 pixel coordinates of the upper left and bottom right corners.
3306 A circle is a cons (circle . ((x0 . y0) . r)) specifying the center
3307 and the radius of the circle; r may be a float or integer.
3308 A polygon is a cons (poly . [x0 y0 x1 y1 ...]) where each pair in the
3309 vector describes one corner in the polygon.
3310
3311 When the mouse pointer is above a hot-spot area of an image, the
3312 PLIST of that hot-spot is consulted; if it contains a `help-echo'
3313 property it defines a tool-tip for the hot-spot, and if it contains
3314 a `pointer' property, it defines the shape of the mouse cursor when
3315 it is over the hot-spot. See the variable 'void-area-text-pointer'
3316 for possible pointer shapes.
3317
3318 When you click the mouse when the mouse pointer is over a hot-spot,
3319 an event is composed by combining the ID of the hot-spot with the
3320 mouse event, e.g. [area4 mouse-1] if the hot-spot's ID is `area4'.
3321
3322 ** Mouse event enhancements:
3323
3324 +++
3325 *** Mouse clicks on fringes now generates left-fringe or right-fringes
3326 events, rather than a text area click event.
3327
3328 +++
3329 *** Mouse clicks in the left and right marginal areas now includes a
3330 sensible buffer position corresponding to the first character in the
3331 corresponding text row.
3332
3333 +++
3334 *** Function `mouse-set-point' now works for events outside text area.
3335
3336 +++
3337 *** Mouse events now includes buffer position for all event types.
3338
3339 +++
3340 *** `posn-point' now returns buffer position for non-text area events.
3341
3342 +++
3343 *** New function `posn-area' returns window area clicked on (nil means
3344 text area).
3345
3346 +++
3347 *** Mouse events include actual glyph column and row for all event types.
3348
3349 +++
3350 *** New function `posn-actual-col-row' returns actual glyph coordinates.
3351
3352 +++
3353 *** Mouse events may now include image object in addition to string object.
3354
3355 +++
3356 *** Mouse events include relative x and y pixel coordinates relative to
3357 the top left corner of the object (image or character) clicked on.
3358
3359 +++
3360 *** Mouse events include the pixel width and height of the object
3361 (image or character) clicked on.
3362
3363 +++
3364 *** New functions 'posn-object', 'posn-object-x-y', and
3365 'posn-object-width-height' return the image or string object of a mouse
3366 click, the x and y pixel coordinates relative to the top left corner
3367 of that object, and the total width and height of that object.
3368
3369 +++
3370 ** New function `force-window-update' can initiate a full redisplay of
3371 one or all windows. Normally, this is not needed as changes in window
3372 contents are detected automatically. However, certain implicit
3373 changes to mode lines, header lines, or display properties may require
3374 forcing an explicit window update.
3375
3376 ---
3377 ** New function `redirect-debugging-output' can be used to redirect
3378 debugging output on the stderr file handle to a file.
3379
3380 +++
3381 ** `split-string' now includes null substrings in the returned list if
3382 the optional argument SEPARATORS is non-nil and there are matches for
3383 SEPARATORS at the beginning or end of the string. If SEPARATORS is
3384 nil, or if the new optional third argument OMIT-NULLS is non-nil, all
3385 empty matches are omitted from the returned list.
3386
3387 +++
3388 ** `makehash' is now obsolete. Use `make-hash-table' instead.
3389
3390 +++
3391 ** If optional third argument APPEND to `add-to-list' is non-nil, a
3392 new element gets added at the end of the list instead of at the
3393 beginning. This change actually occurred in Emacs-21.1, but was not
3394 documented.
3395
3396 +++
3397 ** Major modes can define `eldoc-documentation-function'
3398 locally to provide Eldoc functionality by some method appropriate to
3399 the language.
3400
3401 ---
3402 ** New coding system property `mime-text-unsuitable' indicates that
3403 the coding system's `mime-charset' is not suitable for MIME text
3404 parts, e.g. utf-16.
3405
3406 +++
3407 ** The argument to forward-word, backward-word, forward-to-indentation
3408 and backward-to-indentation is now optional, and defaults to 1.
3409
3410 +++
3411 ** (char-displayable-p CHAR) returns non-nil if Emacs ought to be able
3412 to display CHAR. More precisely, if the selected frame's fontset has
3413 a font to display the character set that CHAR belongs to.
3414
3415 Fontsets can specify a font on a per-character basis; when the fontset
3416 does that, this value may not be accurate.
3417
3418 +++
3419 ** The new function `window-inside-edges' returns the edges of the
3420 actual text portion of the window, not including the scroll bar or
3421 divider line, the fringes, the display margins, the header line and
3422 the mode line.
3423
3424 +++
3425 ** The new functions `window-pixel-edges' and `window-inside-pixel-edges'
3426 return window edges in units of pixels, rather than columns and lines.
3427 2852
3428 +++ 2853 +++
3429 ** The kill-buffer-hook is now permanent-local. 2854 ** The kill-buffer-hook is now permanent-local.
3430 2855
3431 +++ 2856 +++
3432 ** `select-window' takes an optional second argument `norecord', like 2857 ** `auto-save-file-format' has been renamed to
3433 `switch-to-buffer'. 2858 `buffer-auto-save-file-format' and made into a permanent local.
3434 2859
3435 +++ 2860 +++
3436 ** The new macro `with-selected-window' temporarily switches the 2861 ** Functions `file-name-sans-extension' and `file-name-extension' now
3437 selected window without impacting the order of buffer-list. 2862 ignore the leading dots in file names, so that file names such as
3438 2863 `.emacs' are treated as extensionless.
3439 +++ 2864
3440 ** The `keymap' property now also works at the ends of overlays and 2865 +++
3441 text-properties, according to their stickiness. This also means that it 2866 ** copy-file now takes an additional option arg MUSTBENEW.
3442 works with empty overlays. The same hold for the `local-map' property. 2867
3443 2868 This argument works like the MUSTBENEW argument of write-file.
3444 +++ 2869
3445 ** (map-keymap FUNCTION KEYMAP) applies the function to each binding 2870 +++
3446 in the keymap. 2871 ** If the second argument to `copy-file' is the name of a directory,
3447 2872 the file is copied to that directory instead of signaling an error.
3448 --- 2873
3449 ** VC changes for backends: 2874 +++
3450 *** (vc-switches BACKEND OPERATION) is a new function for use by backends. 2875 ** `visited-file-modtime' and `calendar-time-from-absolute' now return
3451 *** The new `find-version' backend function replaces the `destfile' 2876 a list of two integers, instead of a cons.
3452 parameter of the `checkout' backend function.
3453 Old code still works thanks to a default `find-version' behavior that
3454 uses the old `destfile' parameter.
3455
3456 +++
3457 ** The new macro dynamic-completion-table supports using functions
3458 as a dynamic completion table.
3459
3460 (dynamic-completion-table FUN)
3461
3462 FUN is called with one argument, the string for which completion is required,
3463 and it should return an alist containing all the intended possible
3464 completions. This alist may be a full list of possible completions so that FUN
3465 can ignore the value of its argument. If completion is performed in the
3466 minibuffer, FUN will be called in the buffer from which the minibuffer was
3467 entered. dynamic-completion-table then computes the completion.
3468
3469 +++
3470 ** The new macro lazy-completion-table initializes a variable
3471 as a lazy completion table.
3472
3473 (lazy-completion-table VAR FUN &rest ARGS)
3474
3475 If the completion table VAR is used for the first time (e.g., by passing VAR
3476 as an argument to `try-completion'), the function FUN is called with arguments
3477 ARGS. FUN must return the completion table that will be stored in VAR. If
3478 completion is requested in the minibuffer, FUN will be called in the buffer
3479 from which the minibuffer was entered. The return value of
3480 `lazy-completion-table' must be used to initialize the value of VAR.
3481
3482 +++
3483 ** `minor-mode-list' now holds a list of minor mode commands.
3484
3485 +++
3486 ** The new function `modify-all-frames-parameters' modifies parameters
3487 for all (existing and future) frames.
3488
3489 +++
3490 ** `sit-for' can now be called with args (SECONDS &optional NODISP).
3491
3492 +++
3493 ** New standard font-lock face `font-lock-preprocessor-face'.
3494
3495 +++
3496 ** The macro `with-syntax-table' does not copy the table any more.
3497
3498 +++
3499 ** The variable `face-font-rescale-alist' specifies how much larger
3500 (or smaller) font we should use. For instance, if the value is
3501 '((SOME-FONTNAME-PATTERN . 1.3)) and a face requests a font of 10
3502 point, we actually use a font of 13 point if the font matches
3503 SOME-FONTNAME-PATTERN.
3504
3505 +++
3506 ** The function `number-sequence' returns a list of equally-separated
3507 numbers. For instance, (number-sequence 4 9) returns (4 5 6 7 8 9).
3508 By default, the separation is 1, but you can specify a different separation
3509 as the third argument. (number-sequence 1.5 6 2) returns (1.5 3.5 5.5).
3510 2877
3511 +++ 2878 +++
3512 ** `file-chase-links' now takes an optional second argument LIMIT which 2879 ** `file-chase-links' now takes an optional second argument LIMIT which
3513 specifies the maximum number of links to chase through. If after that 2880 specifies the maximum number of links to chase through. If after that
3514 many iterations the file name obtained is still a symbolic link, 2881 many iterations the file name obtained is still a symbolic link,
3515 `file-chase-links' returns it anyway. 2882 `file-chase-links' returns it anyway.
3516 2883
3517 --- 2884 +++
3518 ** `set-fontset-font', `fontset-info', `fontset-font' now operate on 2885 ** The function `commandp' takes an additional optional
3519 the default fontset if the argument NAME is nil.. 2886 argument. If it is non-nil, then `commandp' checks
3520 2887 for a function that could be called with `call-interactively',
3521 +++ 2888 and does not return t for keyboard macros.
3522 ** The escape sequence \s is now interpreted as a SPACE character, 2889
3523 unless it is followed by a `-' in a character constant (e.g. ?\s-A), 2890 +++
3524 in which case it is still interpreted as the super modifier. 2891 ** An interactive specification may now use the code letter 'U' to get
3525 In strings, \s is always interpreted as a space. 2892 the up-event that was discarded in case the last key sequence read for a
3526 2893 previous 'k' or 'K' argument was a down-event; otherwise nil is used.
3527 +++ 2894
3528 ** New function `set-process-filter-multibyte' sets the multibyteness 2895 ---
3529 of a string given to a process's filter. 2896 ** Functions y-or-n-p, read-char, read-key-sequence and the like, that
3530 2897 display a prompt but don't use the minibuffer, now display the prompt
3531 +++ 2898 using the text properties (esp. the face) of the prompt string.
3532 ** New function `process-filter-multibyte-p' returns t if 2899
3533 a string given to a process's filter is multibyte. 2900 +++
3534 2901 ** read-from-minibuffer now accepts an additional argument KEEP-ALL
3535 +++ 2902 saying to put all inputs in the history list, even empty ones.
3536 ** A filter function of a process is called with a multibyte string if
3537 the filter's multibyteness is t. That multibyteness is decided by the
3538 value of `default-enable-multibyte-characters' when the process is
3539 created and can be changed later by `set-process-filter-multibyte'.
3540
3541 +++
3542 ** If a process's coding system is raw-text or no-conversion and its
3543 buffer is multibyte, the output of the process is at first converted
3544 to multibyte by `string-to-multibyte' then inserted in the buffer.
3545 Previously, it was converted to multibyte by `string-as-multibyte',
3546 which was not compatible with the behavior of file reading.
3547
3548 +++
3549 ** New function `string-to-multibyte' converts a unibyte string to a
3550 multibyte string with the same individual character codes.
3551
3552 +++
3553 ** New variables `gc-elapsed' and `gcs-done' provide extra information
3554 on garbage collection.
3555
3556 +++
3557 ** New function `decode-coding-inserted-region' decodes a region as if
3558 it is read from a file without decoding.
3559
3560 +++
3561 ** New function `locale-info' accesses locale information.
3562
3563 +++
3564 ** `save-selected-window' now saves and restores the selected window
3565 of every frame. This way, it restores everything that can be changed
3566 by calling `select-window'.
3567
3568 ---
3569 ** `easy-menu-define' now allows you to use nil for the symbol name
3570 if you don't need to give the menu a name. If you install the menu
3571 into other keymaps right away (MAPS is non-nil), it usually doesn't
3572 need to have a name.
3573
3574 ** Byte compiler changes:
3575
3576 ---
3577 *** `(featurep 'xemacs)' is treated by the compiler as nil. This
3578 helps to avoid noisy compiler warnings in code meant to run under both
3579 Emacs and XEmacs and may sometimes make the result significantly more
3580 efficient. Since byte code from recent versions of XEmacs won't
3581 generally run in Emacs and vice versa, this optimization doesn't lose
3582 you anything.
3583
3584 +++
3585 *** You can avoid warnings for possibly-undefined symbols with a
3586 simple convention that the compiler understands. (This is mostly
3587 useful in code meant to be portable to different Emacs versions.)
3588 Write forms like the following, or code that macroexpands into such
3589 forms:
3590
3591 (if (fboundp 'foo) <then> <else>)
3592 (if (boundp 'foo) <then> <else)
3593
3594 In the first case, using `foo' as a function inside the <then> form
3595 won't produce a warning if it's not defined as a function, and in the
3596 second case, using `foo' as a variable won't produce a warning if it's
3597 unbound. The test must be in exactly one of the above forms (after
3598 macro expansion), but such tests may be nested. Note that `when' and
3599 `unless' expand to `if', but `cond' doesn't.
3600
3601 +++
3602 *** The new macro `with-no-warnings' suppresses all compiler warnings
3603 inside its body. In terms of execution, it is equivalent to `progn'.
3604
3605 +++
3606 ** The new translation table `translation-table-for-input'
3607 is used for customizing self-insertion. The character to
3608 be inserted is translated through it.
3609
3610 +++
3611 ** `load-history' can now have elements of the form (t . FUNNAME),
3612 which means FUNNAME was previously defined as an autoload (before the
3613 current file redefined it).
3614
3615 +++
3616 ** `load-history' now records (defun . FUNNAME) when a function is
3617 defined. For a variable, it records just the variable name.
3618
3619 +++
3620 ** New Lisp library testcover.el works with edebug to help you determine
3621 whether you've tested all your Lisp code. Function testcover-start
3622 instruments all functions in a given file. Then test your code. Function
3623 testcover-mark-all adds overlay "splotches" to the Lisp file's buffer to
3624 show where coverage is lacking. Command testcover-next-mark (bind it to
3625 a key!) will move point forward to the next spot that has a splotch.
3626
3627 *** Normally, a red splotch indicates the form was never completely evaluated;
3628 a brown splotch means it always evaluated to the same value. The red
3629 splotches are skipped for forms that can't possibly complete their evaluation,
3630 such as `error'. The brown splotches are skipped for forms that are expected
3631 to always evaluate to the same value, such as (setq x 14).
3632
3633 *** For difficult cases, you can add do-nothing macros to your code to help
3634 out the test coverage tool. The macro `noreturn' suppresses a red splotch.
3635 It is an error if the argument to `noreturn' does return. The macro 1value
3636 suppresses a brown splotch for its argument. This macro is a no-op except
3637 during test-coverage -- then it signals an error if the argument actually
3638 returns differing values.
3639
3640 +++
3641 ** New function unsafep returns nil if the given Lisp form can't possibly
3642 do anything dangerous; otherwise it returns a reason why the form might be
3643 unsafe (calls dangerous function, alters global variable, etc).
3644
3645 +++
3646 ** The new variable `print-continuous-numbering', when non-nil, says
3647 that successive calls to print functions should use the same
3648 numberings for circular structure references. This is only relevant
3649 when `print-circle' is non-nil.
3650
3651 When you bind `print-continuous-numbering' to t, you should
3652 also bind `print-number-table' to nil.
3653
3654 +++
3655 ** When using non-toolkit scroll bars with the default width,
3656 the scroll-bar-width frame parameter value is nil.
3657
3658 +++
3659 ** The new function copy-abbrev-table returns a new abbrev table that
3660 is a copy of a given abbrev table.
3661
3662 +++
3663 ** The option --script FILE runs Emacs in batch mode and loads FILE.
3664 It is useful for writing Emacs Lisp shell script files, because they
3665 can start with this line:
3666
3667 #!/usr/bin/emacs --script
3668
3669 +++
3670 ** The option --directory DIR now modifies `load-path' immediately.
3671 Directories are added to the front of `load-path' in the order they
3672 appear on the command line. For example, with this command line:
3673
3674 emacs -batch -L .. -L /tmp --eval "(require 'foo)"
3675
3676 Emacs looks for library `foo' in the parent directory, then in /tmp, then
3677 in the other directories in `load-path'. (-L is short for --directory.)
3678
3679 +++
3680 ** A function's docstring can now hold the function's usage info on
3681 its last line. It should match the regexp "\n\n(fn.*)\\'".
3682
3683 ---
3684 ** New CCL functions `lookup-character' and `lookup-integer' access
3685 hash tables defined by the Lisp function `define-translation-hash-table'.
3686
3687 +++
3688 ** The new function `minibufferp' returns non-nil if its optional buffer
3689 argument is a minibuffer. If the argument is omitted it defaults to
3690 the current buffer.
3691
3692 +++
3693 ** There is a new Warnings facility; see the functions `warn'
3694 and `display-warning'.
3695
3696 +++
3697 ** The functions all-completions and try-completion now accept lists
3698 of strings as well as hash-tables additionally to alists, obarrays
3699 and functions. Furthermore, the function `test-completion' is now
3700 exported to Lisp. The keys in alists and hash tables may be either
3701 strings or symbols, which are automatically converted with to strings.
3702
3703 ---
3704 ** When pure storage overflows while dumping, Emacs now prints how
3705 much pure storage it will approximately need.
3706
3707 +++
3708 ** The new variable `auto-coding-functions' lets you specify functions
3709 to examine a file being visited and deduce the proper coding system
3710 for it. (If the coding system is detected incorrectly for a specific
3711 file, you can put a `coding:' tags to override it.)
3712
3713 ---
3714 ** The new function `merge-coding-systems' fills in unspecified aspects
3715 of one coding system from another coding system.
3716
3717 +++
3718 ** The variable `safe-local-eval-forms' specifies a list of forms that
3719 are ok to evaluate when they appear in an `eval' local variables
3720 specification. Normally Emacs asks for confirmation before evaluating
3721 such a form, but if the form appears in this list, no confirmation is
3722 needed.
3723
3724 ---
3725 ** If a function has a non-nil `safe-local-eval-function' property,
3726 that means it is ok to evaluate some calls to that function when it
3727 appears in an `eval' local variables specification. If the property
3728 is t, then any form calling that function with constant arguments is
3729 ok. If the property is a function or list of functions, they are called
3730 with the form as argument, and if any returns t, the form is ok to call.
3731
3732 If the form is not "ok to call", that means Emacs asks for
3733 confirmation as before.
3734
3735 +++
3736 ** Controlling the default left and right fringe widths.
3737
3738 The default left and right fringe widths for all windows of a frame
3739 can now be controlled by setting the `left-fringe' and `right-fringe'
3740 frame parameters to an integer value specifying the width in pixels.
3741 Setting the width to 0 effectively removes the corresponding fringe.
3742
3743 The actual default fringe widths for the frame may deviate from the
3744 specified widths, since the combined fringe widths must match an
3745 integral number of columns. The extra width is distributed evenly
3746 between the left and right fringe. For force a specific fringe width,
3747 specify the width as a negative integer (if both widths are negative,
3748 only the left fringe gets the specified width).
3749
3750 Setting the width to nil (the default), restores the default fringe
3751 width which is the minimum number of pixels necessary to display any
3752 of the currently defined fringe bitmaps. The width of the built-in
3753 fringe bitmaps is 8 pixels.
3754
3755 +++
3756 ** Per-window fringes settings
3757
3758 Windows can now have their own individual fringe widths and position
3759 settings.
3760
3761 To control the fringe widths of a window, either set the buffer-local
3762 variables `left-fringe-width', `right-fringe-width', or call
3763 `set-window-fringes'.
3764
3765 To control the fringe position in a window, that is, whether fringes
3766 are positioned between the display margins and the window's text area,
3767 or at the edges of the window, either set the buffer-local variable
3768 `fringes-outside-margins' or call `set-window-fringes'.
3769
3770 The function `window-fringes' can be used to obtain the current
3771 settings. To make `left-fringe-width', `right-fringe-width', and
3772 `fringes-outside-margins' take effect, you must set them before
3773 displaying the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force
3774 an update of the display margins.
3775
3776 +++
3777 ** Per-window vertical scroll-bar settings
3778
3779 Windows can now have their own individual scroll-bar settings
3780 controlling the width and position of scroll-bars.
3781
3782 To control the scroll-bar of a window, either set the buffer-local
3783 variables `scroll-bar-mode' and `scroll-bar-width', or call
3784 `set-window-scroll-bars'. The function `window-scroll-bars' can be
3785 used to obtain the current settings. To make `scroll-bar-mode' and
3786 `scroll-bar-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying
3787 the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update
3788 of the display margins.
3789
3790 +++
3791 ** The function `set-window-buffer' now has an optional third argument
3792 KEEP-MARGINS which will preserve the window's current margin, fringe,
3793 and scroll-bar settings if non-nil.
3794
3795 +++
3796 ** Renamed hooks to better follow the naming convention:
3797 find-file-hooks to find-file-hook,
3798 find-file-not-found-hooks to find-file-not-found-functions,
3799 write-file-hooks to write-file-functions,
3800 write-contents-hooks to write-contents-functions,
3801 x-lost-selection-hooks to x-lost-selection-functions,
3802 x-sent-selection-hooks to x-sent-selection-functions.
3803 Marked local-write-file-hooks as obsolete (use the LOCAL arg of `add-hook').
3804
3805 +++
3806 ** The new variable `delete-frame-functions' replaces `delete-frame-hook'.
3807 It was renamed to follow the naming conventions for abnormal hooks. The old
3808 name remains available as an alias, but has been marked obsolete.
3809 2903
3810 +++ 2904 +++
3811 ** The `read-file-name' function now takes an additional argument which 2905 ** The `read-file-name' function now takes an additional argument which
3812 specifies a predicate which the file name read must satify. The 2906 specifies a predicate which the file name read must satify. The
3813 new variable `read-file-name-predicate' contains the predicate argument 2907 new variable `read-file-name-predicate' contains the predicate argument
3827 ** The new function `read-directory-name' can be used instead of 2921 ** The new function `read-directory-name' can be used instead of
3828 `read-file-name' to read a directory name; when used, completion 2922 `read-file-name' to read a directory name; when used, completion
3829 will only show directories. 2923 will only show directories.
3830 2924
3831 +++ 2925 +++
3832 ** The new function `file-remote-p' tests a file name and returns 2926 ** The new variable search-spaces-regexp controls how to search
3833 non-nil if it specifies a remote file (one that Emacs accesses using 2927 for spaces in a regular expression. If it is non-nil, it should be a
3834 its own special methods and not directly through the file system). 2928 regular expression, and any series of spaces stands for that regular
3835 The value in that case is an identifier for the remote file system. 2929 expression. If it is nil, spaces stand for themselves.
3836 2930
3837 --- 2931 Spaces inside of constructs such as [..] and *, +, ? are never
3838 ** When a Lisp file uses CL functions at run-time, compiling the file 2932 replaced with search-spaces-regexp.
3839 now issues warnings about these calls, unless the file performs 2933
3840 (require 'cl) when loaded. 2934 +++
3841 2935 ** There are now two new regular expression operators, \_< and \_>,
3842 +++ 2936 for matching the beginning and end of a symbol. A symbol is a
3843 ** The `defmacro' form may contain declarations specifying how to 2937 non-empty sequence of either word or symbol constituent characters, as
3844 indent the macro in Lisp mode and how to debug it with Edebug. The 2938 specified by the syntax table.
3845 syntax of defmacro has been extended to 2939
3846 2940 +++
3847 (defmacro NAME LAMBDA-LIST [DOC-STRING] [DECLARATION ...] ...) 2941 ** skip-chars-forward and skip-chars-backward now handle
3848 2942 character classes such as [:alpha:], along with individual characters
3849 DECLARATION is a list `(declare DECLARATION-SPECIFIER ...)'. The 2943 and ranges.
3850 declaration specifiers supported are: 2944
3851 2945 ---
3852 (indent INDENT) 2946 ** In `replace-match', the replacement text no longer inherits
3853 Set NAME's `lisp-indent-function' property to INDENT. 2947 properties from surrounding text.
3854 2948
3855 (edebug DEBUG) 2949 +++
3856 Set NAME's `edebug-form-spec' property to DEBUG. (This is 2950 ** The list returned by `(match-data t)' now has the buffer as a final
3857 equivalent to writing a `def-edebug-spec' for the macro. 2951 element, if the last match was on a buffer. `set-match-data'
3858 2952 accepts such a list for restoring the match state.
3859 +++ 2953
3860 ** Interactive commands can be remapped through keymaps. 2954 +++
2955 ** Variable aliases have been implemented:
2956
2957 *** defvaralias ALIAS-VAR BASE-VAR [DOCSTRING]
2958
2959 This function defines the symbol ALIAS-VAR as a variable alias for
2960 symbol BASE-VAR. This means that retrieving the value of ALIAS-VAR
2961 returns the value of BASE-VAR, and changing the value of ALIAS-VAR
2962 changes the value of BASE-VAR.
2963
2964 DOCSTRING, if present, is the documentation for ALIAS-VAR; else it has
2965 the same documentation as BASE-VAR.
2966
2967 *** indirect-variable VARIABLE
2968
2969 This function returns the variable at the end of the chain of aliases
2970 of VARIABLE. If VARIABLE is not a symbol, or if VARIABLE is not
2971 defined as an alias, the function returns VARIABLE.
2972
2973 It might be noteworthy that variables aliases work for all kinds of
2974 variables, including buffer-local and frame-local variables.
2975
2976 +++
2977 *** The macro define-obsolete-variable-alias combines defvaralias and
2978 make-obsolete-variable. The macro define-obsolete-function-alias
2979 combines defalias and make-obsolete.
2980
2981 +++
2982 ** Enhancements to keymaps.
2983
2984 *** Cleaner way to enter key sequences.
2985
2986 You can enter a constant key sequence in a more natural format, the
2987 same one used for saving keyboard macros, using the macro `kbd'. For
2988 example,
2989
2990 (kbd "C-x C-f") => "\^x\^f"
2991
2992 *** Interactive commands can be remapped through keymaps.
3861 2993
3862 This is an alternative to using defadvice or substitute-key-definition 2994 This is an alternative to using defadvice or substitute-key-definition
3863 to modify the behavior of a key binding using the normal keymap 2995 to modify the behavior of a key binding using the normal keymap
3864 binding and lookup functionality. 2996 binding and lookup functionality.
3865 2997
3911 3043
3912 - The new variable `this-original-command' contains the original 3044 - The new variable `this-original-command' contains the original
3913 command before remapping. It is equal to `this-command' when the 3045 command before remapping. It is equal to `this-command' when the
3914 command was not remapped. 3046 command was not remapped.
3915 3047
3916 +++ 3048 *** If text has a `keymap' property, that keymap takes precedence
3917 ** New variable emulation-mode-map-alists. 3049 over minor mode keymaps.
3050
3051 *** The `keymap' property now also works at the ends of overlays and
3052 text-properties, according to their stickiness. This also means that it
3053 works with empty overlays. The same hold for the `local-map' property.
3054
3055 *** Dense keymaps now handle inheritance correctly.
3056 Previously a dense keymap would hide all of the simple-char key
3057 bindings of the parent keymap.
3058
3059 *** `define-key-after' now accepts keys longer than 1.
3060
3061 *** New function `current-active-maps' returns a list of currently
3062 active keymaps.
3063
3064 *** New function `describe-buffer-bindings' inserts the list of all
3065 defined keys and their definitions.
3066
3067 *** New function `keymap-prompt' returns the prompt-string of a keymap
3068
3069 *** (map-keymap FUNCTION KEYMAP) applies the function to each binding
3070 in the keymap.
3071
3072 *** New variable emulation-mode-map-alists.
3918 3073
3919 Lisp packages using many minor mode keymaps can now maintain their own 3074 Lisp packages using many minor mode keymaps can now maintain their own
3920 keymap alist separate from minor-mode-map-alist by adding their keymap 3075 keymap alist separate from minor-mode-map-alist by adding their keymap
3921 alist to this list. 3076 alist to this list.
3922 3077
3977 will lead to undesirable results, so don't let it happen; the first 3132 will lead to undesirable results, so don't let it happen; the first
3978 change group you start for any given buffer should be the last one 3133 change group you start for any given buffer should be the last one
3979 finished. 3134 finished.
3980 3135
3981 +++ 3136 +++
3982 ** New variable char-property-alias-alist. 3137 ** Progress reporters.
3983 3138 The new functions `make-progress-reporter', `progress-reporter-update',
3984 This variable allows you to create alternative names for text 3139 `progress-reporter-force-update', `progress-reporter-done', and
3985 properties. It works at the same level as `default-text-properties', 3140 `dotimes-with-progress-reporter' provide a simple and efficient way for
3986 although it applies to overlays as well. This variable was introduced 3141 a command to present progress messages for the user.
3987 to implement the `font-lock-face' property.
3988
3989 +++
3990 ** New special text property `font-lock-face'.
3991
3992 This property acts like the `face' property, but it is controlled by
3993 M-x font-lock-mode. It is not, strictly speaking, a builtin text
3994 property. Instead, it is implemented inside font-core.el, using the
3995 new variable `char-property-alias-alist'.
3996
3997 +++
3998 ** New function remove-list-of-text-properties.
3999
4000 The new function `remove-list-of-text-properties' is almost the same
4001 as `remove-text-properties'. The only difference is that it takes
4002 a list of property names as argument rather than a property list.
4003
4004 +++
4005 ** New function insert-for-yank.
4006
4007 This function normally works like `insert' but removes the text
4008 properties in the `yank-excluded-properties' list. However, if the
4009 inserted text has a `yank-handler' text property on the first
4010 character of the string, the insertion of the text may be modified in
4011 a number of ways. See the description of `yank-handler' below.
4012
4013 +++
4014 ** New function insert-buffer-substring-as-yank.
4015
4016 This function works like `insert-buffer-substring', but removes the
4017 text properties in the `yank-excluded-properties' list.
4018
4019 +++
4020 ** New function insert-buffer-substring-no-properties.
4021
4022 This function is like insert-buffer-substring, but removes all
4023 text properties from the inserted substring.
4024 3142
4025 +++ 3143 +++
4026 ** New `yank-handler' text property may be used to control how 3144 ** New `yank-handler' text property may be used to control how
4027 previously killed text on the kill-ring is reinserted. 3145 previously killed text on the kill-ring is reinserted.
4028 3146
4048 If UNDO is present and non-nil, it is a function that will be called 3166 If UNDO is present and non-nil, it is a function that will be called
4049 by `yank-pop' to undo the insertion of the current object. It is 3167 by `yank-pop' to undo the insertion of the current object. It is
4050 called with two arguments, the start and end of the current region. 3168 called with two arguments, the start and end of the current region.
4051 FUNCTION may set `yank-undo-function' to override the UNDO value. 3169 FUNCTION may set `yank-undo-function' to override the UNDO value.
4052 3170
4053 +++
4054 *** The functions kill-new, kill-append, and kill-region now have an 3171 *** The functions kill-new, kill-append, and kill-region now have an
4055 optional argument to specify the yank-handler text property to put on 3172 optional argument to specify the yank-handler text property to put on
4056 the killed text. 3173 the killed text.
4057 3174
4058 +++
4059 *** The function yank-pop will now use a non-nil value of the variable 3175 *** The function yank-pop will now use a non-nil value of the variable
4060 `yank-undo-function' (instead of delete-region) to undo the previous 3176 `yank-undo-function' (instead of delete-region) to undo the previous
4061 yank or yank-pop command (or a call to insert-for-yank). The function 3177 yank or yank-pop command (or a call to insert-for-yank). The function
4062 insert-for-yank automatically sets that variable according to the UNDO 3178 insert-for-yank automatically sets that variable according to the UNDO
4063 element of the string argument's yank-handler text property if present. 3179 element of the string argument's yank-handler text property if present.
4064 3180
4065 +++ 3181 *** The function `insert-for-yank' now supports strings where the
4066 ** New function display-supports-face-attributes-p may be used to test 3182 `yank-handler' property does not span the first character of the
4067 whether a given set of face attributes is actually displayable. 3183 string. The old behavior is available if you call
4068 3184 `insert-for-yank-1' instead.
4069 A new predicate `supports' has also been added to the `defface' face 3185
4070 specification language, which can be used to do this test for faces 3186 *** The new function insert-for-yank normally works like `insert', but
4071 defined with defface. 3187 removes the text properties in the `yank-excluded-properties' list.
4072 3188 However, the insertion of the text may be modified by a `yank-handler'
4073 --- 3189 text property.
4074 ** The function face-differs-from-default-p now truly checks whether the 3190
4075 given face displays differently from the default face or not (previously 3191 +++
4076 it did only a very cursory check). 3192 ** An element of buffer-undo-list can now have the form (apply FUNNAME
4077 3193 . ARGS), where FUNNAME is a symbol other than t or nil. That stands
4078 +++ 3194 for a high-level change that should be undone by evaluating (apply
4079 ** face-attribute, face-foreground, face-background, and face-stipple now 3195 FUNNAME ARGS).
4080 accept a new optional argument, INHERIT, which controls how face 3196
4081 inheritance is used when determining the value of a face attribute. 3197 These entries can also have the form (apply DELTA BEG END FUNNAME . ARGS)
4082 3198 which indicates that the change which took place was limited to the
4083 +++ 3199 range BEG...END and increased the buffer size by DELTA.
4084 ** New functions face-attribute-relative-p and merge-face-attribute 3200
4085 help with handling relative face attributes. 3201 +++
4086 3202 ** If the buffer's undo list for the current command gets longer than
4087 +++ 3203 undo-outer-limit, garbage collection empties it. This is to prevent
4088 ** The priority of faces in an :inherit attribute face-list is reversed. 3204 it from using up the available memory and choking Emacs.
4089 If a face contains an :inherit attribute with a list of faces, earlier
4090 faces in the list override later faces in the list; in previous releases
4091 of Emacs, the order was the opposite. This change was made so that
4092 :inherit face-lists operate identically to face-lists in text `face'
4093 properties.
4094 3205
4095 +++ 3206 +++
4096 ** Enhancements to process support 3207 ** Enhancements to process support
4097 3208
4098 *** Function list-processes now has an optional argument; if non-nil, 3209 *** Function list-processes now has an optional argument; if non-nil,
4119 is handled, suspending output from other processes. If value is an 3230 is handled, suspending output from other processes. If value is an
4120 integer, also inhibit running timers. This feature is generally not 3231 integer, also inhibit running timers. This feature is generally not
4121 recommended, but may be necessary for specific applications, such as 3232 recommended, but may be necessary for specific applications, such as
4122 speech synthesis. 3233 speech synthesis.
4123 3234
4124 ---
4125 *** Adaptive read buffering of subprocess output. 3235 *** Adaptive read buffering of subprocess output.
4126 3236
4127 On some systems, when emacs reads the output from a subprocess, the 3237 On some systems, when emacs reads the output from a subprocess, the
4128 output data is read in very small blocks, potentially resulting in 3238 output data is read in very small blocks, potentially resulting in
4129 very poor performance. This behavior can be remedied to some extent 3239 very poor performance. This behavior can be remedied to some extent
4130 by setting the new variable process-adaptive-read-buffering to a 3240 by setting the new variable process-adaptive-read-buffering to a
4131 non-nil value (the default), as it will automatically delay reading 3241 non-nil value (the default), as it will automatically delay reading
4132 from such processes, to allowing them to produce more output before 3242 from such processes, to allowing them to produce more output before
4133 emacs tries to read it. 3243 emacs tries to read it.
3244
3245 *** The new function `call-process-shell-command' executes a shell
3246 command command synchronously in a separate process.
3247
3248 *** The new function `process-file' is similar to `call-process', but
3249 obeys file handlers. The file handler is chosen based on
3250 default-directory.
3251
3252 *** The new function `set-process-filter-multibyte' sets the
3253 multibyteness of a string given to a process's filter.
3254
3255 *** The new function `process-filter-multibyte-p' returns t if a
3256 string given to a process's filter is multibyte.
3257
3258 *** A filter function of a process is called with a multibyte string
3259 if the filter's multibyteness is t. That multibyteness is decided by
3260 the value of `default-enable-multibyte-characters' when the process is
3261 created and can be changed later by `set-process-filter-multibyte'.
3262
3263 *** If a process's coding system is raw-text or no-conversion and its
3264 buffer is multibyte, the output of the process is at first converted
3265 to multibyte by `string-to-multibyte' then inserted in the buffer.
3266 Previously, it was converted to multibyte by `string-as-multibyte',
3267 which was not compatible with the behavior of file reading.
4134 3268
4135 +++ 3269 +++
4136 ** Enhanced networking support. 3270 ** Enhanced networking support.
4137 3271
4138 *** There is a new `make-network-process' function which supports 3272 *** There is a new `make-network-process' function which supports
4203 *** New function network-interface-info. 3337 *** New function network-interface-info.
4204 3338
4205 This function returns the network address, hardware address, current 3339 This function returns the network address, hardware address, current
4206 status, and other information about a specific network interface. 3340 status, and other information about a specific network interface.
4207 3341
4208 +++ 3342 *** The sentinel is now called when a network process is deleted with
4209 ** New function copy-tree. 3343 delete-process. The status message passed to the sentinel for a
4210 3344 deleted network process is "deleted". The message passed to the
4211 +++ 3345 sentinel when the connection is closed by the remote peer has been
4212 ** New function substring-no-properties. 3346 changed to "connection broken by remote peer".
4213 3347
4214 +++ 3348 +++
4215 ** New function minibuffer-selected-window. 3349 ** New function `force-window-update' can initiate a full redisplay of
4216 3350 one or all windows. Normally, this is not needed as changes in window
4217 +++ 3351 contents are detected automatically. However, certain implicit
4218 ** New function `call-process-shell-command'. 3352 changes to mode lines, header lines, or display properties may require
4219 3353 forcing an explicit window update.
4220 +++ 3354
4221 ** New function `process-file'. 3355 +++
4222 3356 ** You can now make a window as short as one line.
4223 This is similar to `call-process', but obeys file handlers. The file 3357
4224 handler is chosen based on default-directory. 3358 A window that is just one line tall does not display either a mode
4225 3359 line or a header line, even if the variables `mode-line-format' and
4226 --- 3360 `header-line-format' call for them. A window that is two lines tall
4227 ** The dummy function keys made by easymenu 3361 cannot display both a mode line and a header line at once; if the
4228 are now always lower case. If you specify the 3362 variables call for both, only the mode line actually appears.
4229 menu item name "Ada", for instance, it uses `ada' 3363
3364 +++
3365 ** The line-move, scroll-up, and scroll-down functions will now
3366 modify the window vscroll to scroll through display rows that are
3367 taller that the height of the window, for example in the presense of
3368 large images. To disable this feature, Lisp code may bind the new
3369 variable `auto-window-vscroll' to nil.
3370
3371 +++
3372 ** Function `compute-motion' now calculates the usable window
3373 width if the WIDTH argument is nil. If the TOPOS argument is nil,
3374 the usable window height and width is used.
3375
3376 +++
3377 ** Function pos-visible-in-window-p now returns the pixel coordinates
3378 and partial visiblity state of the corresponding row, if the PARTIALLY
3379 arg is non-nil.
3380
3381 +++
3382 ** The new function `window-inside-edges' returns the edges of the
3383 actual text portion of the window, not including the scroll bar or
3384 divider line, the fringes, the display margins, the header line and
3385 the mode line.
3386
3387 +++
3388 ** The new functions `window-pixel-edges' and `window-inside-pixel-edges'
3389 return window edges in units of pixels, rather than columns and lines.
3390
3391 +++
3392 ** The new macro `with-selected-window' temporarily switches the
3393 selected window without impacting the order of buffer-list.
3394
3395 +++
3396 ** `select-window' takes an optional second argument `norecord', like
3397 `switch-to-buffer'.
3398
3399 +++
3400 ** `save-selected-window' now saves and restores the selected window
3401 of every frame. This way, it restores everything that can be changed
3402 by calling `select-window'.
3403
3404 +++
3405 ** The function `set-window-buffer' now has an optional third argument
3406 KEEP-MARGINS which will preserve the window's current margin, fringe,
3407 and scroll-bar settings if non-nil.
3408
3409 +++
3410 ** Customizable fringe bitmaps
3411
3412 *** New function 'define-fringe-bitmap' can now be used to create new
3413 fringe bitmaps, as well as change the built-in fringe bitmaps.
3414
3415 To change a built-in bitmap, do (require 'fringe) and use the symbol
3416 identifing the bitmap such as `left-truncation or `continued-line'.
3417
3418 *** New function 'destroy-fringe-bitmap' may be used to destroy a
3419 previously created bitmap, or restore a built-in bitmap.
3420
3421 *** New function 'set-fringe-bitmap-face' can now be used to set a
3422 specific face to be used for a specific fringe bitmap. The face is
3423 automatically merged with the `fringe' face, so normally, the face
3424 should only specify the foreground color of the bitmap.
3425
3426 *** There are new display properties, left-fringe and right-fringe,
3427 that can be used to show a specific bitmap in the left or right fringe
3428 bitmap of the display line.
3429
3430 Format is 'display '(left-fringe BITMAP [FACE]), where BITMAP is a
3431 symbol identifying a fringe bitmap, either built-in or defined with
3432 `define-fringe-bitmap', and FACE is an optional face name to be used
3433 for displaying the bitmap instead of the default `fringe' face.
3434 When specified, FACE is automatically merged with the `fringe' face.
3435
3436 *** New function `fringe-bitmaps-at-pos' returns the current fringe
3437 bitmaps in the display line at a given buffer position.
3438
3439 +++
3440 ** Controlling the default left and right fringe widths.
3441
3442 The default left and right fringe widths for all windows of a frame
3443 can now be controlled by setting the `left-fringe' and `right-fringe'
3444 frame parameters to an integer value specifying the width in pixels.
3445 Setting the width to 0 effectively removes the corresponding fringe.
3446
3447 The actual default fringe widths for the frame may deviate from the
3448 specified widths, since the combined fringe widths must match an
3449 integral number of columns. The extra width is distributed evenly
3450 between the left and right fringe. For force a specific fringe width,
3451 specify the width as a negative integer (if both widths are negative,
3452 only the left fringe gets the specified width).
3453
3454 Setting the width to nil (the default), restores the default fringe
3455 width which is the minimum number of pixels necessary to display any
3456 of the currently defined fringe bitmaps. The width of the built-in
3457 fringe bitmaps is 8 pixels.
3458
3459 +++
3460 ** Per-window fringe and scrollbar settings
3461
3462 *** Windows can now have their own individual fringe widths and
3463 position settings.
3464
3465 To control the fringe widths of a window, either set the buffer-local
3466 variables `left-fringe-width', `right-fringe-width', or call
3467 `set-window-fringes'.
3468
3469 To control the fringe position in a window, that is, whether fringes
3470 are positioned between the display margins and the window's text area,
3471 or at the edges of the window, either set the buffer-local variable
3472 `fringes-outside-margins' or call `set-window-fringes'.
3473
3474 The function `window-fringes' can be used to obtain the current
3475 settings. To make `left-fringe-width', `right-fringe-width', and
3476 `fringes-outside-margins' take effect, you must set them before
3477 displaying the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force
3478 an update of the display margins.
3479
3480 *** Windows can now have their own individual scroll-bar settings
3481 controlling the width and position of scroll-bars.
3482
3483 To control the scroll-bar of a window, either set the buffer-local
3484 variables `scroll-bar-mode' and `scroll-bar-width', or call
3485 `set-window-scroll-bars'. The function `window-scroll-bars' can be
3486 used to obtain the current settings. To make `scroll-bar-mode' and
3487 `scroll-bar-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying
3488 the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update
3489 of the display margins.
3490
3491 +++
3492 ** When using non-toolkit scroll bars with the default width,
3493 the scroll-bar-width frame parameter value is nil.
3494
3495 +++
3496 ** Multiple overlay arrows can now be defined and managed via the new
3497 variable `overlay-arrow-variable-list'. It contains a list of
3498 varibles which contain overlay arrow position markers, including
3499 the original `overlay-arrow-position' variable.
3500
3501 Each variable on this list may have individual `overlay-arrow-string'
3502 and `overlay-arrow-bitmap' properties that specify an overlay arrow
3503 string (for non-window terminals) or fringe bitmap (for window
3504 systems) to display at the corresponding overlay arrow position.
3505 If either property is not set, the default `overlay-arrow-string' or
3506 'overlay-arrow-fringe-bitmap' will be used.
3507
3508 +++
3509 ** New line-height and line-spacing properties for newline characters
3510
3511 A newline may now have line-height and line-spacing text or overlay
3512 properties that control the height of the corresponding display row.
3513
3514 If the line-height property value is t, the newline does not
3515 contribute to the height of the display row; instead the height of the
3516 newline glyph is reduced. Also, a line-spacing property on this
3517 newline is ignored. This can be used to tile small images or image
3518 slices without adding blank areas between the images.
3519
3520 If the line-height property value is a positive integer, the value
3521 specifies the minimum line height in pixels. If necessary, the line
3522 height it increased by increasing the line's ascent.
3523
3524 If the line-height property value is a float, the minimum line height
3525 is calculated by multiplying the default frame line height by the
3526 given value.
3527
3528 If the line-height property value is a cons (FACE . RATIO), the
3529 minimum line height is calculated as RATIO * height of named FACE.
3530 RATIO is int or float. If FACE is t, it specifies the current face.
3531
3532 If the line-height property value is a cons (nil . RATIO), the line
3533 height is calculated as RATIO * actual height of the line's contents.
3534
3535 If the line-height value is a cons (HEIGHT . TOTAL), HEIGHT specifies
3536 the line height as described above, while TOTAL is any of the forms
3537 described above and specifies the total height of the line, causing a
3538 varying number of pixels to be inserted after the line to make it line
3539 exactly that many pixels high.
3540
3541 If the line-spacing property value is an positive integer, the value
3542 is used as additional pixels to insert after the display line; this
3543 overrides the default frame line-spacing and any buffer local value of
3544 the line-spacing variable.
3545
3546 If the line-spacing property may be a float or cons, the line spacing
3547 is calculated as specified above for the line-height property.
3548
3549 +++
3550 ** The buffer local line-spacing variable may now have a float value,
3551 which is used as a height relative to the default frame line height.
3552
3553 +++
3554 ** Enhancements to stretch display properties
3555
3556 The display property stretch specification form `(space PROPS)', where
3557 PROPS is a property list now allows pixel based width and height
3558 specifications, as well as enhanced horizontal text alignment.
3559
3560 The value of these properties can now be a (primitive) expression
3561 which is evaluated during redisplay. The following expressions
3562 are supported:
3563
3564 EXPR ::= NUM | (NUM) | UNIT | ELEM | POS | IMAGE | FORM
3565 NUM ::= INTEGER | FLOAT | SYMBOL
3566 UNIT ::= in | mm | cm | width | height
3567 ELEM ::= left-fringe | right-fringe | left-margin | right-margin
3568 | scroll-bar | text
3569 POS ::= left | center | right
3570 FORM ::= (NUM . EXPR) | (OP EXPR ...)
3571 OP ::= + | -
3572
3573 The form `NUM' specifies a fractional width or height of the default
3574 frame font size. The form `(NUM)' specifies an absolute number of
3575 pixels. If a symbol is specified, its buffer-local variable binding
3576 is used. The `in', `mm', and `cm' units specifies the number of
3577 pixels per inch, milli-meter, and centi-meter, resp. The `width' and
3578 `height' units correspond to the width and height of the current face
3579 font. An image specification corresponds to the width or height of
3580 the image.
3581
3582 The `left-fringe', `right-fringe', `left-margin', `right-margin',
3583 `scroll-bar', and `text' elements specify to the width of the
3584 corresponding area of the window.
3585
3586 The `left', `center', and `right' positions can be used with :align-to
3587 to specify a position relative to the left edge, center, or right edge
3588 of the text area. One of the above window elements (except `text')
3589 can also be used with :align-to to specify that the position is
3590 relative to the left edge of the given area. Once the base offset for
3591 a relative position has been set (by the first occurrence of one of
3592 these symbols), further occurences of these symbols are interpreted as
3593 the width of the area.
3594
3595 For example, to align to the center of the left-margin, use
3596 :align-to (+ left-margin (0.5 . left-margin))
3597
3598 If no specific base offset is set for alignment, it is always relative
3599 to the left edge of the text area. For example, :align-to 0 in a
3600 header-line aligns with the first text column in the text area.
3601
3602 The value of the form `(NUM . EXPR)' is the value of NUM multiplied by
3603 the value of the expression EXPR. For example, (2 . in) specifies a
3604 width of 2 inches, while (0.5 . IMAGE) specifies half the width (or
3605 height) of the specified image.
3606
3607 The form `(+ EXPR ...)' adds up the value of the expressions.
3608 The form `(- EXPR ...)' negates or subtracts the value of the expressions.
3609
3610 +++
3611 ** Support for displaying image slices
3612
3613 *** New display property (slice X Y WIDTH HEIGHT) may be used with
3614 an image property to display only a specific slice of the image.
3615
3616 *** Function insert-image has new optional fourth arg to
3617 specify image slice (X Y WIDTH HEIGHT).
3618
3619 *** New function insert-sliced-image inserts a given image as a
3620 specified number of evenly sized slices (rows x columns).
3621
3622 +++
3623 ** Images may now have an associated image map via the :map property.
3624
3625 An image map is an alist where each element has the format (AREA ID PLIST).
3626 An AREA is specified as either a rectangle, a circle, or a polygon:
3627 A rectangle is a cons (rect . ((x0 . y0) . (x1 . y1))) specifying the
3628 pixel coordinates of the upper left and bottom right corners.
3629 A circle is a cons (circle . ((x0 . y0) . r)) specifying the center
3630 and the radius of the circle; r may be a float or integer.
3631 A polygon is a cons (poly . [x0 y0 x1 y1 ...]) where each pair in the
3632 vector describes one corner in the polygon.
3633
3634 When the mouse pointer is above a hot-spot area of an image, the
3635 PLIST of that hot-spot is consulted; if it contains a `help-echo'
3636 property it defines a tool-tip for the hot-spot, and if it contains
3637 a `pointer' property, it defines the shape of the mouse cursor when
3638 it is over the hot-spot. See the variable 'void-area-text-pointer'
3639 for possible pointer shapes.
3640
3641 When you click the mouse when the mouse pointer is over a hot-spot,
3642 an event is composed by combining the ID of the hot-spot with the
3643 mouse event, e.g. [area4 mouse-1] if the hot-spot's ID is `area4'.
3644
3645 +++ (lispref)
3646 ??? (man)
3647 ** The mouse pointer shape in void text areas (i.e. after the end of a
3648 line or below the last line in the buffer) of the text window is now
3649 controlled by the new variable `void-text-area-pointer'. The default
3650 is to use the `arrow' (non-text) pointer. Other choices are `text'
3651 (or nil), `hand', `vdrag', `hdrag', `modeline', and `hourglass'.
3652
3653 +++
3654 ** The mouse pointer shape over an image can now be controlled by the
3655 :pointer image property.
3656
3657 +++
3658 ** Lisp code can now test if a given buffer position is inside a
3659 clickable link with the new function `mouse-on-link-p'. This is the
3660 function used by the new `mouse-1-click-follows-link' functionality.
3661
3662 +++
3663 ** The mouse pointer shape over ordinary text or images may now be
3664 controlled/overriden via the `pointer' text property.
3665
3666 ** Mouse event enhancements:
3667
3668 +++
3669 *** Mouse clicks on fringes now generates left-fringe or right-fringes
3670 events, rather than a text area click event.
3671
3672 +++
3673 *** Mouse clicks in the left and right marginal areas now includes a
3674 sensible buffer position corresponding to the first character in the
3675 corresponding text row.
3676
3677 +++
3678 *** Function `mouse-set-point' now works for events outside text area.
3679
3680 +++
3681 *** Mouse events now includes buffer position for all event types.
3682
3683 +++
3684 *** `posn-point' now returns buffer position for non-text area events.
3685
3686 +++
3687 *** New function `posn-area' returns window area clicked on (nil means
3688 text area).
3689
3690 +++
3691 *** Mouse events include actual glyph column and row for all event types.
3692
3693 +++
3694 *** New function `posn-actual-col-row' returns actual glyph coordinates.
3695
3696 +++
3697 *** Mouse events may now include image object in addition to string object.
3698
3699 +++
3700 *** Mouse events include relative x and y pixel coordinates relative to
3701 the top left corner of the object (image or character) clicked on.
3702
3703 +++
3704 *** Mouse events include the pixel width and height of the object
3705 (image or character) clicked on.
3706
3707 +++
3708 *** New functions 'posn-object', 'posn-object-x-y', and
3709 'posn-object-width-height' return the image or string object of a mouse
3710 click, the x and y pixel coordinates relative to the top left corner
3711 of that object, and the total width and height of that object.
3712
3713 +++
3714 ** At the end of a command, point moves out from within invisible
3715 text, in the same way it moves out from within text covered by an
3716 image or composition property.
3717
3718 This makes it generally unnecessary to mark invisible text as intangible.
3719 This is particularly good because the intangible property often has
3720 unexpected side-effects since the property applies to everything
3721 (including `goto-char', ...) whereas this new code is only run after
3722 post-command-hook and thus does not care about intermediate states.
3723
3724 +++
3725 ** Normally, the cursor is displayed at the end of any overlay and
3726 text property string that may be present at the current window
3727 position. The cursor may now be placed on any character of such
3728 strings by giving that character a non-nil `cursor' text property.
3729
3730 +++
3731 ** The display space :width and :align-to text properties are now
3732 supported on text terminals.
3733
3734 +++
3735 ** Arguments for remove-overlays are now optional, so that you can
3736 remove all overlays in the buffer by just calling (remove-overlay).
3737
3738 +++
3739 ** New variable char-property-alias-alist.
3740
3741 This variable allows you to create alternative names for text
3742 properties. It works at the same level as `default-text-properties',
3743 although it applies to overlays as well. This variable was introduced
3744 to implement the `font-lock-face' property.
3745
3746 +++
3747 ** New function `get-char-property-and-overlay' accepts the same
3748 arguments as `get-char-property' and returns a cons whose car is the
3749 return value of `get-char-property' called with those arguments and
3750 whose cdr is the overlay in which the property was found, or nil if
3751 it was found as a text property or not found at all.
3752
3753 +++
3754 ** The new frame parameter `tty-color-mode' specifies the mode to use
3755 for color support on character terminal frames. Its value can be a
3756 number of colors to support, or a symbol. See the Emacs Lisp
3757 Reference manual for more detailed documentation.
3758
3759 +++
3760 ** The new face attribute `min-colors' can be used to tailor the face
3761 color to the number of colors supported by a display, and define the
3762 foreground and background colors accordingly so that they look best on
3763 a terminal that supports at least this many colors. This is now the
3764 preferred method for defining default faces in a way that makes a good
3765 use of the capabilities of the display.
3766
3767 +++
3768 ** (char-displayable-p CHAR) returns non-nil if Emacs ought to be able
3769 to display CHAR. More precisely, if the selected frame's fontset has
3770 a font to display the character set that CHAR belongs to.
3771
3772 Fontsets can specify a font on a per-character basis; when the fontset
3773 does that, this value may not be accurate.
3774
3775 +++
3776 ** New function display-supports-face-attributes-p may be used to test
3777 whether a given set of face attributes is actually displayable.
3778
3779 A new predicate `supports' has also been added to the `defface' face
3780 specification language, which can be used to do this test for faces
3781 defined with defface.
3782
3783 ---
3784 ** The special treatment of faces whose names are of the form `fg:COLOR'
3785 or `bg:COLOR' has been removed. Lisp programs should use the
3786 `defface' facility for defining faces with specific colors, or use
3787 the feature of specifying the face attributes :foreground and :background
3788 directly in the `face' property instead of using a named face.
3789
3790 +++
3791 ** The first face specification element in a defface can specify
3792 `default' instead of frame classification. Then its attributes act as
3793 defaults that apply to all the subsequent cases (and may be overridden
3794 by them).
3795
3796 +++
3797 ** The variable `face-font-rescale-alist' specifies how much larger
3798 (or smaller) font we should use. For instance, if the value is
3799 '((SOME-FONTNAME-PATTERN . 1.3)) and a face requests a font of 10
3800 point, we actually use a font of 13 point if the font matches
3801 SOME-FONTNAME-PATTERN.
3802
3803 ---
3804 ** `set-fontset-font', `fontset-info', `fontset-font' now operate on
3805 the default fontset if the argument NAME is nil..
3806
3807 ---
3808 ** The function face-differs-from-default-p now truly checks whether the
3809 given face displays differently from the default face or not (previously
3810 it did only a very cursory check).
3811
3812 +++
3813 ** face-attribute, face-foreground, face-background, and face-stipple now
3814 accept a new optional argument, INHERIT, which controls how face
3815 inheritance is used when determining the value of a face attribute.
3816
3817 +++
3818 ** New functions face-attribute-relative-p and merge-face-attribute
3819 help with handling relative face attributes.
3820
3821 +++
3822 ** The priority of faces in an :inherit attribute face-list is reversed.
3823 If a face contains an :inherit attribute with a list of faces, earlier
3824 faces in the list override later faces in the list; in previous releases
3825 of Emacs, the order was the opposite. This change was made so that
3826 :inherit face-lists operate identically to face-lists in text `face'
3827 properties.
3828
3829 +++
3830 ** New standard font-lock face `font-lock-preprocessor-face'.
3831
3832 +++
3833 ** New special text property `font-lock-face'.
3834
3835 This property acts like the `face' property, but it is controlled by
3836 M-x font-lock-mode. It is not, strictly speaking, a builtin text
3837 property. Instead, it is implemented inside font-core.el, using the
3838 new variable `char-property-alias-alist'.
3839
3840 ---
3841 ** jit-lock obeys a new text-property `jit-lock-defer-multiline'.
3842 If a piece of text with that property gets contextually refontified
3843 (see jit-lock-defer-contextually), then all of that text will
3844 be refontified. This is useful when the syntax of a textual element
3845 depends on text several lines further down (and when font-lock-multiline
3846 is not appropriate to solve that problem). For example in Perl:
3847
3848 s{
3849 foo
3850 }{
3851 bar
3852 }e
3853
3854 Adding/removing the last `e' changes the `bar' from being a piece of
3855 text to being a piece of code, so you'd put a jit-lock-defer-multiline
3856 property over the second half of the command to force (deferred)
3857 refontification of `bar' whenever the `e' is added/removed.
3858
3859 +++
3860 ** font-lock can manage arbitrary text-properties beside `face'.
3861 *** the FACENAME returned in font-lock-keywords can be a list
3862 of the form (face FACE PROP1 VAL1 PROP2 VAL2 ...) so you can set
3863 other properties than `face'.
3864 *** font-lock-extra-managed-props can be set to make sure those extra
3865 properties are automatically cleaned up by font-lock.
3866
3867 ---
3868 ** The precedence of file-name-handlers has been changed.
3869 Instead of blindly choosing the first handler that matches,
3870 find-file-name-handler now gives precedence to a file-name handler
3871 that matches near the end of the file name. More specifically, the
3872 handler whose (match-beginning 0) is the largest is chosen.
3873 In case of ties, the old "first matched" rule applies.
3874
3875 +++
3876 ** A file name handler can declare which operations it handles.
3877
3878 You do this by putting an `operation' property on the handler name
3879 symbol. The property value should be a list of the operations that
3880 the handler really handles. It won't be called for any other
3881 operations.
3882
3883 This is useful for autoloaded handlers, to prevent them from being
3884 autoloaded when not really necessary.
3885
3886 +++
3887 ** `set-auto-mode' now gives the interpreter magic line (if present)
3888 precedence over the file name. Likewise an <?xml or <!DOCTYPE declaration
3889 will give the buffer XML or SGML mode, based on the new var
3890 `magic-mode-alist'.
3891
3892 +++
3893 ** Major mode functions now run the new normal hook
3894 `after-change-major-mode-hook', at their very end, after the mode hooks.
3895
3896 ---
3897 ** If a major mode function has a non-nil `no-clone-indirect'
3898 property, `clone-indirect-buffer' signals an error if you use
3899 it in that buffer.
3900
3901 +++
3902 ** Major modes can define `eldoc-documentation-function'
3903 locally to provide Eldoc functionality by some method appropriate to
3904 the language.
3905
3906 +++
3907 ** define-derived-mode by default creates a new empty abbrev table.
3908 It does not copy abbrevs from the parent mode's abbrev table.
3909
3910 +++
3911 ** define-minor-mode now accepts arbitrary additional keyword arguments
3912 and simply passes them to defcustom, if applicable.
3913
3914 +++
3915 ** The new function `run-mode-hooks' and the new macro `delay-mode-hooks'
3916 are used by define-derived-mode to make sure the mode hook for the
3917 parent mode is run at the end of the child mode.
3918
3919 +++
3920 ** `minor-mode-list' now holds a list of minor mode commands.
3921
3922 +++
3923 ** Both the variable and the function `disabled-command-hook' have
3924 been renamed to `disabled-command-function'. The variable
3925 `disabled-command-hook' has been kept as an obsolete alias.
3926
3927 +++
3928 ** The function `eql' is now available without requiring the CL package.
3929
3930 +++
3931 ** If optional third argument APPEND to `add-to-list' is non-nil, a
3932 new element gets added at the end of the list instead of at the
3933 beginning. This change actually occurred in Emacs-21.1, but was not
3934 documented.
3935
3936 +++
3937 ** The escape sequence \s is now interpreted as a SPACE character,
3938 unless it is followed by a `-' in a character constant (e.g. ?\s-A),
3939 in which case it is still interpreted as the super modifier.
3940 In strings, \s is always interpreted as a space.
3941
3942 +++
3943 ** A hex escape in a string forces the string to be multibyte.
3944 An octal escape makes it unibyte.
3945
3946 +++
3947 ** `split-string' now includes null substrings in the returned list if
3948 the optional argument SEPARATORS is non-nil and there are matches for
3949 SEPARATORS at the beginning or end of the string. If SEPARATORS is
3950 nil, or if the new optional third argument OMIT-NULLS is non-nil, all
3951 empty matches are omitted from the returned list.
3952
3953 +++
3954 ** New function `string-to-multibyte' converts a unibyte string to a
3955 multibyte string with the same individual character codes.
3956
3957 +++
3958 ** The function `number-sequence' returns a list of equally-separated
3959 numbers. For instance, (number-sequence 4 9) returns (4 5 6 7 8 9).
3960 By default, the separation is 1, but you can specify a different separation
3961 as the third argument. (number-sequence 1.5 6 2) returns (1.5 3.5 5.5).
3962
3963 +++
3964 ** `sit-for' can now be called with args (SECONDS &optional NODISP).
3965
3966 +++
3967 ** A function's docstring can now hold the function's usage info on
3968 its last line. It should match the regexp "\n\n(fn.*)\\'".
3969
3970 +++
3971 ** The `defmacro' form may contain declarations specifying how to
3972 indent the macro in Lisp mode and how to debug it with Edebug. The
3973 syntax of defmacro has been extended to
3974
3975 (defmacro NAME LAMBDA-LIST [DOC-STRING] [DECLARATION ...] ...)
3976
3977 DECLARATION is a list `(declare DECLARATION-SPECIFIER ...)'. The
3978 declaration specifiers supported are:
3979
3980 (indent INDENT)
3981 Set NAME's `lisp-indent-function' property to INDENT.
3982
3983 (edebug DEBUG)
3984 Set NAME's `edebug-form-spec' property to DEBUG. (This is
3985 equivalent to writing a `def-edebug-spec' for the macro.
3986
3987 +++
3988 ** The functions all-completions and try-completion now accept lists
3989 of strings as well as hash-tables additionally to alists, obarrays
3990 and functions. Furthermore, the function `test-completion' is now
3991 exported to Lisp. The keys in alists and hash tables may be either
3992 strings or symbols, which are automatically converted with to strings.
3993
3994 +++
3995 ** The new macro dynamic-completion-table supports using functions
3996 as a dynamic completion table.
3997
3998 (dynamic-completion-table FUN)
3999
4000 FUN is called with one argument, the string for which completion is required,
4001 and it should return an alist containing all the intended possible
4002 completions. This alist may be a full list of possible completions so that FUN
4003 can ignore the value of its argument. If completion is performed in the
4004 minibuffer, FUN will be called in the buffer from which the minibuffer was
4005 entered. dynamic-completion-table then computes the completion.
4006
4007 +++
4008 ** The new macro lazy-completion-table initializes a variable
4009 as a lazy completion table.
4010
4011 (lazy-completion-table VAR FUN &rest ARGS)
4012
4013 If the completion table VAR is used for the first time (e.g., by passing VAR
4014 as an argument to `try-completion'), the function FUN is called with arguments
4015 ARGS. FUN must return the completion table that will be stored in VAR. If
4016 completion is requested in the minibuffer, FUN will be called in the buffer
4017 from which the minibuffer was entered. The return value of
4018 `lazy-completion-table' must be used to initialize the value of VAR.
4019
4020 +++
4021 ** `load-history' can now have elements of the form (t . FUNNAME),
4022 which means FUNNAME was previously defined as an autoload (before the
4023 current file redefined it).
4024
4025 +++
4026 ** `load-history' now records (defun . FUNNAME) when a function is
4027 defined. For a variable, it records just the variable name.
4028
4029 ---
4030 ** The variable `recursive-load-depth-limit' has been deleted.
4031 Emacs now signals an error if the same file is loaded with more
4032 than 3 levels of nesting.
4033
4034 +++
4035 ** The function symbol-file can now search specifically for function or
4036 variable definitions.
4037
4038 +++
4039 ** `provide' and `featurep' now accept an optional second argument
4040 to test/provide subfeatures. Also `provide' now checks `after-load-alist'
4041 and runs any code associated with the provided feature.
4042
4043 +++
4044 ** `declare' is now a macro. This change was made mostly for
4045 documentation purposes and should have no real effect on Lisp code.
4046
4047 +++
4048 ** Byte compiler changes:
4049
4050 *** The byte-compiler now displays the actual line and character
4051 position of errors, where possible. Additionally, the form of its
4052 warning and error messages have been brought more in line with the
4053 output of other GNU tools.
4054
4055 *** The new macro `with-no-warnings' suppresses all compiler warnings
4056 inside its body. In terms of execution, it is equivalent to `progn'.
4057
4058 *** You can avoid warnings for possibly-undefined symbols with a
4059 simple convention that the compiler understands. (This is mostly
4060 useful in code meant to be portable to different Emacs versions.)
4061 Write forms like the following, or code that macroexpands into such
4062 forms:
4063
4064 (if (fboundp 'foo) <then> <else>)
4065 (if (boundp 'foo) <then> <else)
4066
4067 In the first case, using `foo' as a function inside the <then> form
4068 won't produce a warning if it's not defined as a function, and in the
4069 second case, using `foo' as a variable won't produce a warning if it's
4070 unbound. The test must be in exactly one of the above forms (after
4071 macro expansion), but such tests may be nested. Note that `when' and
4072 `unless' expand to `if', but `cond' doesn't.
4073
4074 *** `(featurep 'xemacs)' is treated by the compiler as nil. This
4075 helps to avoid noisy compiler warnings in code meant to run under both
4076 Emacs and XEmacs and may sometimes make the result significantly more
4077 efficient. Since byte code from recent versions of XEmacs won't
4078 generally run in Emacs and vice versa, this optimization doesn't lose
4079 you anything.
4080
4081 *** The local variable `no-byte-compile' in elisp files is now obeyed.
4082
4083 ---
4084 ** When a Lisp file uses CL functions at run-time, compiling the file
4085 now issues warnings about these calls, unless the file performs
4086 (require 'cl) when loaded.
4087
4088 +++
4089 ** New function unsafep returns nil if the given Lisp form can't possibly
4090 do anything dangerous; otherwise it returns a reason why the form might be
4091 unsafe (calls dangerous function, alters global variable, etc).
4092
4093 +++
4094 ** There is a new Warnings facility; see the functions `warn'
4095 and `display-warning'.
4096
4097 ---
4098 ** VC changes for backends:
4099 *** (vc-switches BACKEND OPERATION) is a new function for use by backends.
4100 *** The new `find-version' backend function replaces the `destfile'
4101 parameter of the `checkout' backend function.
4102 Old code still works thanks to a default `find-version' behavior that
4103 uses the old `destfile' parameter.
4104
4105 +++
4106 ** Already true in Emacs 21.1, but not emphasized clearly enough:
4107
4108 Multibyte buffers can now faithfully record all 256 character codes
4109 from 0 to 255. As a result, most of the past reasons to use unibyte
4110 buffers no longer exist. We only know of three reasons to use them
4111 now:
4112
4113 1. If you prefer to use unibyte text all of the time.
4114
4115 2. For reading files into temporary buffers, when you want to avoid
4116 the time it takes to convert the format.
4117
4118 3. For binary files where format conversion would be pointless and
4119 wasteful.
4120
4121 ---
4122 ** set-buffer-file-coding-system now takes an additional argument,
4123 NOMODIFY. If it is non-nil, it means don't mark the buffer modified.
4124
4125 +++
4126 ** The new variable `auto-coding-functions' lets you specify functions
4127 to examine a file being visited and deduce the proper coding system
4128 for it. (If the coding system is detected incorrectly for a specific
4129 file, you can put a `coding:' tags to override it.)
4130
4131 ---
4132 ** The new function `merge-coding-systems' fills in unspecified aspects
4133 of one coding system from another coding system.
4134
4135 ---
4136 ** New coding system property `mime-text-unsuitable' indicates that
4137 the coding system's `mime-charset' is not suitable for MIME text
4138 parts, e.g. utf-16.
4139
4140 +++
4141 ** New function `decode-coding-inserted-region' decodes a region as if
4142 it is read from a file without decoding.
4143
4144 +++
4145 ** Function `translate-region' accepts also a char-table as TABLE
4146 argument.
4147
4148 +++
4149 ** The new translation table `translation-table-for-input'
4150 is used for customizing self-insertion. The character to
4151 be inserted is translated through it.
4152
4153 ---
4154 ** New CCL functions `lookup-character' and `lookup-integer' access
4155 hash tables defined by the Lisp function `define-translation-hash-table'.
4156
4157 +++
4158 ** The flags, width, and precision options for %-specifications in function
4159 `format' are now documented. Some flags that were accepted but not
4160 implemented (such as "*") are no longer accepted.
4161
4162 ---
4163 ** New function `redirect-debugging-output' can be used to redirect
4164 debugging output on the stderr file handle to a file.
4165
4166 +++
4167 ** `makehash' is now obsolete. Use `make-hash-table' instead.
4168
4169 +++
4170 ** The macro `with-syntax-table' does not copy the table any more.
4171
4172 +++
4173 ** New variables `gc-elapsed' and `gcs-done' provide extra information
4174 on garbage collection.
4175
4176 +++
4177 ** New function `locale-info' accesses locale information.
4178
4179 +++
4180 ** The new variable `print-continuous-numbering', when non-nil, says
4181 that successive calls to print functions should use the same
4182 numberings for circular structure references. This is only relevant
4183 when `print-circle' is non-nil.
4184
4185 When you bind `print-continuous-numbering' to t, you should
4186 also bind `print-number-table' to nil.
4187
4188 ---
4189 ** When pure storage overflows while dumping, Emacs now prints how
4190 much pure storage it will approximately need.
4191
4192 +++
4193 ** File local variables.
4194
4195 A file local variables list cannot specify a string with text
4196 properties--any specified text properties are discarded.
4197
4198 +++
4199 ** The variable `safe-local-eval-forms' specifies a list of forms that
4200 are ok to evaluate when they appear in an `eval' local variables
4201 specification. Normally Emacs asks for confirmation before evaluating
4202 such a form, but if the form appears in this list, no confirmation is
4203 needed.
4204
4205 ---
4206 ** If a function has a non-nil `safe-local-eval-function' property,
4207 that means it is ok to evaluate some calls to that function when it
4208 appears in an `eval' local variables specification. If the property
4209 is t, then any form calling that function with constant arguments is
4210 ok. If the property is a function or list of functions, they are called
4211 with the form as argument, and if any returns t, the form is ok to call.
4212
4213 If the form is not "ok to call", that means Emacs asks for
4214 confirmation as before.
4215
4216 +++
4217 ** Renamed hooks to better follow the naming convention:
4218 find-file-hooks to find-file-hook,
4219 find-file-not-found-hooks to find-file-not-found-functions,
4220 write-file-hooks to write-file-functions,
4221 write-contents-hooks to write-contents-functions,
4222 x-lost-selection-hooks to x-lost-selection-functions,
4223 x-sent-selection-hooks to x-sent-selection-functions.
4224 Marked local-write-file-hooks as obsolete (use the LOCAL arg of `add-hook').
4225
4226 +++
4227 ** The new variable `delete-frame-functions' replaces `delete-frame-hook'.
4228 It was renamed to follow the naming conventions for abnormal hooks. The old
4229 name remains available as an alias, but has been marked obsolete.
4230
4231 +++
4232 ** The new function `file-remote-p' tests a file name and returns
4233 non-nil if it specifies a remote file (one that Emacs accesses using
4234 its own special methods and not directly through the file system).
4235 The value in that case is an identifier for the remote file system.
4236
4237 +++
4238 ** Functions `get' and `plist-get' no longer signals an error for
4239 a malformed property list. They also detect cyclic lists.
4240
4241 +++
4242 ** The function `atan' now accepts an optional second argument.
4243
4244 When called with 2 arguments, as in `(atan Y X)', `atan' returns the
4245 angle in radians between the vector [X, Y] and the X axis. (This is
4246 equivalent to the standard C library function `atan2'.)
4247
4248 +++
4249 ** New function format-mode-line.
4250
4251 This returns the mode-line or header-line of the selected (or a
4252 specified) window as a string with or without text properties.
4253
4254 +++
4255 ** The new mode-line construct `(:propertize ELT PROPS...)' can be
4256 used to add text properties to mode-line elements.
4257
4258 +++
4259 ** The new `%i' and `%I' constructs for `mode-line-format' can be used
4260 to display the size of the accessible part of the buffer on the mode
4261 line.
4262
4263 ---
4264 ** Indentation of simple and extended loop forms has been added to the
4265 cl-indent package. The new user options
4266 `lisp-loop-keyword-indentation', `lisp-loop-forms-indentation', and
4267 `lisp-simple-loop-indentation' can be used to customize the
4268 indentation of keywords and forms in loop forms.
4269
4270 ---
4271 ** Indentation of backquoted forms has been made customizable in the
4272 cl-indent package. See the new user option `lisp-backquote-indentation'.
4273
4274 +++
4275 ** field-beginning and field-end now accept an additional optional
4276 argument, LIMIT.
4277
4278 +++
4279 ** define-abbrev now accepts an optional argument SYSTEM-FLAG. If
4280 non-nil, this marks the abbrev as a "system" abbrev, which means that
4281 it won't be stored in the user's abbrevs file if he saves the abbrevs.
4282 Major modes that predefine some abbrevs should always specify this
4283 flag.
4284
4285 ---
4286 ** describe-vector now takes a second argument `describer' which is
4287 called to print the entries' values. It defaults to `princ'.
4288
4289 +++
4290 ** defcustom and other custom declarations now use a default group
4291 (the last prior group defined in the same file) when no :group was given.
4292
4293 ---
4294 ** The new customization type `float' specifies numbers with floating
4295 point (no integers are allowed).
4296
4297 +++
4298 ** emacsserver now runs pre-command-hook and post-command-hook when
4299 it receives a request from emacsclient.
4300
4301 ---
4302 ** New function `text-clone-create'. Text clones are chunks of text
4303 that are kept identical by transparently propagating changes from one
4304 clone to the other.
4305
4306 +++
4307 ** Functions `user-uid' and `user-real-uid' now return floats if the
4308 user UID doesn't fit in a Lisp integer. Function `user-full-name'
4309 accepts a float as UID parameter.
4310
4311 +++
4312 ** New vars `exec-suffixes' and `load-suffixes' used when
4313 searching for an executable resp. an elisp file.
4314
4315 +++
4316 ** Functions from `post-gc-hook' are run at the end of garbage
4317 collection. The hook is run with GC inhibited, so use it with care.
4318
4319 +++
4320 ** The variables most-positive-fixnum and most-negative-fixnum
4321 hold the largest and smallest possible integer values.
4322
4323 ---
4324 ** On MS Windows, locale-coding-system is used to interact with the OS.
4325 The Windows specific variable w32-system-coding-system, which was
4326 formerly used for that purpose is now an alias for locale-coding-system.
4327
4328 ---
4329 ** New function x-send-client-message sends a client message when
4330 running under X.
4331
4332 ---
4333 ** easy-mmode-define-global-mode has been renamed to
4334 define-global-minor-mode. The old name remains as an alias.
4335
4336 ---
4337 ** To manipulate the File menu using easy-menu, you must specify the
4338 proper name "file". In previous Emacs versions, you had to specify
4339 "files", even though the menu item itself was changed to say "File"
4340 several versions ago.
4341
4342 ---
4343 ** The dummy function keys made by easymenu are now always lower case.
4344 If you specify the menu item name "Ada", for instance, it uses `ada'
4230 as the "key" bound by that key binding. 4345 as the "key" bound by that key binding.
4231 4346
4232 This is relevant only if Lisp code looks for 4347 This is relevant only if Lisp code looks for the bindings that were
4233 the bindings that were made with easymenu. 4348 made with easymenu.
4234 4349
4235 +++ 4350 ---
4236 ** The function `commandp' takes an additional optional 4351 ** `easy-menu-define' now allows you to use nil for the symbol name
4237 argument. If it is non-nil, then `commandp' checks 4352 if you don't need to give the menu a name. If you install the menu
4238 for a function that could be called with `call-interactively', 4353 into other keymaps right away (MAPS is non-nil), it usually doesn't
4239 and does not return t for keyboard macros. 4354 need to have a name.
4240 4355
4241 --- 4356 ** New functions, macros, and commands:
4242 ** master-mode.el implements a minor mode for scrolling a slave 4357
4358 +++
4359 *** The new function `assoc-string' replaces `assoc-ignore-case' and
4360 `assoc-ignore-representation', which are still available, but have
4361 been declared obsolete.
4362
4363 +++
4364 *** The new function `buffer-local-value' returns the buffer-local
4365 binding of VARIABLE (a symbol) in buffer BUFFER. If VARIABLE does not
4366 have a buffer-local binding in buffer BUFFER, it returns the default
4367 value of VARIABLE instead.
4368
4369 +++
4370 *** The new function `called-interactively-p' does what many people
4371 have mistakenly believed `interactive-p' did: it returns t if the
4372 calling function was called through `call-interactively'. This should
4373 only be used when you cannot add a new "interactive" argument to the
4374 command.
4375
4376 *** The new function copy-abbrev-table returns a new abbrev table that
4377 is a copy of a given abbrev table.
4378
4379 +++
4380 *** New function copy-tree makes a copy of a tree, recursively copying
4381 both cars and cdrs.
4382
4383 +++
4384 *** New function `delete-dups' destructively removes `equal'
4385 duplicates from a list. Of several `equal' occurrences of an element
4386 in the list, the first one is kept.
4387
4388 +++
4389 *** The new function `filter-buffer-substring' extracts a buffer
4390 substring, passes it through a set of filter functions, and returns
4391 the filtered substring. It is used instead of `buffer-substring' or
4392 `delete-and-extract-region' when copying text into a user-accessible
4393 data structure, like the kill-ring, X clipboard, or a register. The
4394 list of filter function is specified by the new variable
4395 `buffer-substring-filters'. For example, Longlines mode uses
4396 `buffer-substring-filters' to remove soft newlines from the copied
4397 text.
4398
4399 +++
4400 *** New functions frame-current-scroll-bars and window-current-scroll-bars.
4401
4402 These functions return the current locations of the vertical and
4403 horizontal scroll bars in a frame or window.
4404
4405 +++
4406 *** The new primitive `get-internal-run-time' returns the processor
4407 run time used by Emacs since start-up.
4408
4409 +++
4410 *** The new function insert-buffer-substring-as-yank works like
4411 `insert-buffer-substring', but removes the text properties in the
4412 `yank-excluded-properties' list.
4413
4414 +++
4415 *** The new function insert-buffer-substring-no-properties is like
4416 insert-buffer-substring, but removes all text properties from the
4417 inserted substring.
4418
4419 +++
4420 *** The new functions `lax-plist-get' and `lax-plist-put' are like
4421 `plist-get' and `plist-put', except that they compare the property
4422 name using `equal' rather than `eq'.
4423
4424 +++
4425 *** New function `line-number-at-pos' returns the line number of the
4426 current line in the current buffer, or if optional buffer position is
4427 given, line number of corresponding line in current buffer.
4428
4429 +++
4430 *** New function `looking-back' checks whether a regular expression matches
4431 the text before point. Specifying the LIMIT argument bounds how far
4432 back the match can start; this is a way to keep it from taking too long.
4433
4434 +++
4435 *** New function `macroexpand-all' expands all macros in a form.
4436 It is similar to the Common-Lisp function of the same name.
4437 One difference is that it guarantees to return the original argument
4438 if no expansion is done, which may be tested using `eq'.
4439
4440 *** The new function `minibufferp' returns non-nil if its optional
4441 buffer argument is a minibuffer. If the argument is omitted, it
4442 defaults to the current buffer.
4443
4444 +++
4445 *** New function minibuffer-selected-window returns the window which
4446 was selected when entering the minibuffer.
4447
4448 +++
4449 *** The new function `modify-all-frames-parameters' modifies parameters
4450 for all (existing and future) frames.
4451
4452 +++
4453 *** New functions posn-at-point and posn-at-x-y return
4454 click-event-style position information for a given visible buffer
4455 position or for a given window pixel coordinate.
4456
4457 ---
4458 *** New function quail-find-key returns a list of keys to type in the
4459 current input method to input a character.
4460
4461 +++
4462 *** The new function `rassq-delete-all' deletes all elements from an
4463 alist whose cdr is `eq' to a specified value.
4464
4465 +++
4466 *** The new function remove-list-of-text-properties is almost the same
4467 as `remove-text-properties'. The only difference is that it takes a
4468 list of property names as argument rather than a property list.
4469
4470 +++
4471 *** The new primitive `set-file-times' sets a file's access and
4472 modification times. Magic file name handlers can handle this
4473 operation.
4474
4475 +++
4476 *** New function substring-no-properties returns a substring without
4477 text properties.
4478
4479 +++
4480 *** The new function syntax-after returns the syntax code
4481 of the character after a specified buffer position, taking account
4482 of text properties as well as the character code.
4483
4484 +++
4485 *** `syntax-class' extracts the class of a syntax code (as returned
4486 by syntax-after).
4487
4488 +++
4489 *** New function `tool-bar-local-item-from-menu'
4490
4491 The `tool-bar-add-item-from-menu' must not be used (as previously
4492 recommended) for making entries in the tool bar for local keymaps.
4493 Instead, use the function `tool-bar-local-item-from-menu', which lets
4494 you specify the map to use as an argument.
4495
4496 +++
4497 *** New function window-body-height.
4498 This is like window-height but does not count the mode line
4499 or the header line.
4500
4501 +++
4502 *** (while-no-input BODY...) runs BODY, but only so long as no input
4503 arrives. If the user types or clicks anything, BODY stops as if a
4504 quit had occurred. while-no-input returns the value of BODY, if BODY
4505 finishes. It returns nil if BODY was aborted.
4506
4507 +++
4508 *** New macro with-local-quit temporarily sets inhibit-quit to nil for use
4509 around potentially blocking or long-running code in timers
4510 and post-command-hooks.
4511
4512 ** New packages:
4513
4514 *** The new package syntax.el provides an efficient way to find the
4515 current syntactic context (as returned by parse-partial-sexp).
4516
4517 *** The new package bindat.el provides functions to unpack and pack
4518 binary data structures, such as network packets, to and from Lisp
4519 data structures.
4520
4521 ---
4522 *** The TCL package tcl-mode.el was replaced by tcl.el.
4523 This was actually done in Emacs-21.1, and was not documented.
4524
4525 +++
4526 *** The new package button.el implements simple and fast `clickable buttons'
4527 in emacs buffers. `buttons' are much lighter-weight than the `widgets'
4528 implemented by widget.el, and can be used by lisp code that doesn't
4529 require the full power of widgets. Emacs uses buttons for such things
4530 as help and apropos buffers.
4531
4532 ---
4533 *** master-mode.el implements a minor mode for scrolling a slave
4243 buffer without leaving your current buffer, the master buffer. 4534 buffer without leaving your current buffer, the master buffer.
4244 4535
4245 It can be used by sql.el, for example: the SQL buffer is the master 4536 It can be used by sql.el, for example: the SQL buffer is the master
4246 and its SQLi buffer is the slave. This allows you to scroll the SQLi 4537 and its SQLi buffer is the slave. This allows you to scroll the SQLi
4247 buffer containing the output from the SQL buffer containing the 4538 buffer containing the output from the SQL buffer containing the
4258 (add-hook 'sql-set-sqli-hook 4549 (add-hook 'sql-set-sqli-hook
4259 (function (lambda () 4550 (function (lambda ()
4260 (master-set-slave sql-buffer)))) 4551 (master-set-slave sql-buffer))))
4261 4552
4262 +++ 4553 +++
4263 ** File local variables. 4554 *** New Lisp library testcover.el works with edebug to help you determine
4264 4555 whether you've tested all your Lisp code. Function testcover-start
4265 A file local variables list cannot specify a string with text 4556 instruments all functions in a given file. Then test your code. Function
4266 properties--any specified text properties are discarded. 4557 testcover-mark-all adds overlay "splotches" to the Lisp file's buffer to
4267 4558 show where coverage is lacking. Command testcover-next-mark (bind it to
4268 +++ 4559 a key!) will move point forward to the next spot that has a splotch.
4269 ** New function window-body-height. 4560
4270 4561 Normally, a red splotch indicates the form was never completely
4271 This is like window-height but does not count the mode line 4562 evaluated; a brown splotch means it always evaluated to the same
4272 or the header line. 4563 value. The red splotches are skipped for forms that can't possibly
4273 4564 complete their evaluation, such as `error'. The brown splotches are
4274 +++ 4565 skipped for forms that are expected to always evaluate to the same
4275 ** New function format-mode-line. 4566 value, such as (setq x 14).
4276 4567
4277 This returns the mode-line or header-line of the selected (or a 4568 For difficult cases, you can add do-nothing macros to your code to
4278 specified) window as a string with or without text properties. 4569 help out the test coverage tool. The macro `noreturn' suppresses a
4279 4570 red splotch. It is an error if the argument to `noreturn' does
4280 +++ 4571 return. The macro 1value suppresses a brown splotch for its argument.
4281 ** Functions `get' and `plist-get' no longer signals an error for 4572 This macro is a no-op except during test-coverage -- then it signals
4282 a malformed property list. They also detect cyclic lists. 4573 an error if the argument actually returns differing values.
4283
4284 +++
4285 ** New functions `lax-plist-get' and `lax-plist-put'.
4286
4287 These functions are like `plist-get' and `plist-put' except that they
4288 compare the property name using `equal' rather than `eq'.
4289
4290 +++
4291 ** New function `tool-bar-local-item-from-menu'
4292
4293 The `tool-bar-add-item-from-menu' must not be used (as previously
4294 recommended) for making entries in the tool bar for local keymaps.
4295 Instead, use the function `tool-bar-local-item-from-menu', which lets
4296 you specify the map to use as an argument.
4297
4298 +++
4299 ** The function `atan' now accepts an optional second argument.
4300
4301 When called with 2 arguments, as in `(atan Y X)', `atan' returns the
4302 angle in radians between the vector [X, Y] and the X axis. (This is
4303 equivalent to the standard C library function `atan2'.)
4304
4305 +++
4306 ** You can now make a window as short as one line.
4307
4308 A window that is just one line tall does not display either a mode
4309 line or a header line, even if the variables `mode-line-format' and
4310 `header-line-format' call for them. A window that is two lines tall
4311 cannot display both a mode line and a header line at once; if the
4312 variables call for both, only the mode line actually appears.
4313
4314 +++
4315 ** The new frame parameter `tty-color-mode' specifies the mode to use
4316 for color support on character terminal frames. Its value can be a
4317 number of colors to support, or a symbol. See the Emacs Lisp
4318 Reference manual for more detailed documentation.
4319
4320 +++
4321 ** The new mode-line construct `(:propertize ELT PROPS...)' can be
4322 used to add text properties to mode-line elements.
4323
4324 +++
4325 ** The new `%i' and `%I' constructs for `mode-line-format' can be used
4326 to display the size of the accessible part of the buffer on the mode
4327 line.
4328
4329 ---
4330 ** Indentation of simple and extended loop forms has been added to the
4331 cl-indent package. The new user options
4332 `lisp-loop-keyword-indentation', `lisp-loop-forms-indentation', and
4333 `lisp-simple-loop-indentation' can be used to customize the
4334 indentation of keywords and forms in loop forms.
4335
4336 ---
4337 ** Indentation of backquoted forms has been made customizable in the
4338 cl-indent package. See the new user option `lisp-backquote-indentation'.
4339
4340 +++
4341 ** Already true in Emacs 21.1, but not emphasized clearly enough:
4342
4343 Multibyte buffers can now faithfully record all 256 character codes
4344 from 0 to 255. As a result, most of the past reasons to use unibyte
4345 buffers no longer exist. We only know of three reasons to use them
4346 now:
4347
4348 1. If you prefer to use unibyte text all of the time.
4349
4350 2. For reading files into temporary buffers, when you want to avoid
4351 the time it takes to convert the format.
4352
4353 3. For binary files where format conversion would be pointless and
4354 wasteful.
4355
4356 +++
4357 ** If text has a `keymap' property, that keymap takes precedence
4358 over minor mode keymaps.
4359
4360 +++
4361 ** A hex escape in a string forces the string to be multibyte.
4362 An octal escape makes it unibyte.
4363
4364 +++
4365 ** At the end of a command, point moves out from within invisible
4366 text, in the same way it moves out from within text covered by an
4367 image or composition property.
4368
4369 This makes it generally unnecessary to mark invisible text as intangible.
4370 This is particularly good because the intangible property often has
4371 unexpected side-effects since the property applies to everything
4372 (including `goto-char', ...) whereas this new code is only run after
4373 post-command-hook and thus does not care about intermediate states.
4374
4375 +++
4376 ** field-beginning and field-end now accept an additional optional
4377 argument, LIMIT.
4378
4379 +++
4380 ** define-abbrev now accepts an optional argument SYSTEM-FLAG. If
4381 non-nil, this marks the abbrev as a "system" abbrev, which means that
4382 it won't be stored in the user's abbrevs file if he saves the abbrevs.
4383 Major modes that predefine some abbrevs should always specify this
4384 flag.
4385 4574
4386 --- 4575 ---
4387 ** Support for Mocklisp has been removed. 4576 ** Support for Mocklisp has been removed.
4388 4577
4389 --- 4578 ---
4390 ** The function insert-string is now obsolete. 4579 ** The function insert-string is now obsolete.
4391
4392 ---
4393 ** The precedence of file-name-handlers has been changed.
4394 Instead of blindly choosing the first handler that matches,
4395 find-file-name-handler now gives precedence to a file-name handler
4396 that matches near the end of the file name. More specifically, the
4397 handler whose (match-beginning 0) is the largest is chosen.
4398 In case of ties, the old "first matched" rule applies.
4399
4400 ---
4401 ** Dense keymaps now handle inheritance correctly.
4402 Previously a dense keymap would hide all of the simple-char key
4403 bindings of the parent keymap.
4404
4405 ---
4406 ** jit-lock obeys a new text-property `jit-lock-defer-multiline'.
4407 If a piece of text with that property gets contextually refontified
4408 (see jit-lock-defer-contextually), then all of that text will
4409 be refontified. This is useful when the syntax of a textual element
4410 depends on text several lines further down (and when font-lock-multiline
4411 is not appropriate to solve that problem). For example in Perl:
4412
4413 s{
4414 foo
4415 }{
4416 bar
4417 }e
4418
4419 Adding/removing the last `e' changes the `bar' from being a piece of
4420 text to being a piece of code, so you'd put a jit-lock-defer-multiline
4421 property over the second half of the command to force (deferred)
4422 refontification of `bar' whenever the `e' is added/removed.
4423
4424 ---
4425 ** describe-vector now takes a second argument `describer' which is
4426 called to print the entries' values. It defaults to `princ'.
4427
4428 +++
4429 ** defcustom and other custom declarations now use a default group
4430 (the last prior group defined in the same file) when no :group was given.
4431
4432 +++
4433 ** emacsserver now runs pre-command-hook and post-command-hook when
4434 it receives a request from emacsclient.
4435
4436 ---
4437 ** The variable `recursive-load-depth-limit' has been deleted.
4438 Emacs now signals an error if the same file is loaded with more
4439 than 3 levels of nesting.
4440
4441 ---
4442 ** If a major mode function has a non-nil `no-clone-indirect'
4443 property, `clone-indirect-buffer' signals an error if you use
4444 it in that buffer.
4445
4446 ---
4447 ** In `replace-match', the replacement text no longer inherits
4448 properties from surrounding text.
4449
4450 +++
4451 ** The list returned by `(match-data t)' now has the buffer as a final
4452 element, if the last match was on a buffer. `set-match-data'
4453 accepts such a list for restoring the match state.
4454
4455 +++
4456 ** New function `buffer-local-value'.
4457
4458 This function returns the buffer-local binding of VARIABLE (a symbol)
4459 in buffer BUFFER. If VARIABLE does not have a buffer-local binding in
4460 buffer BUFFER, it returns the default value of VARIABLE instead.
4461
4462 ---
4463 ** New function `text-clone-create'. Text clones are chunks of text
4464 that are kept identical by transparently propagating changes from one
4465 clone to the other.
4466
4467 +++
4468 ** font-lock can manage arbitrary text-properties beside `face'.
4469 *** the FACENAME returned in font-lock-keywords can be a list
4470 of the form (face FACE PROP1 VAL1 PROP2 VAL2 ...) so you can set
4471 other properties than `face'.
4472 *** font-lock-extra-managed-props can be set to make sure those extra
4473 properties are automatically cleaned up by font-lock.
4474
4475 ---
4476 ** The special treatment of faces whose names are of the form `fg:COLOR'
4477 or `bg:COLOR' has been removed. Lisp programs should use the
4478 `defface' facility for defining faces with specific colors, or use
4479 the feature of specifying the face attributes :foreground and :background
4480 directly in the `face' property instead of using a named face.
4481
4482 +++
4483 ** The new function `run-mode-hooks' and the new macro `delay-mode-hooks'
4484 are used by define-derived-mode to make sure the mode hook for the
4485 parent mode is run at the end of the child mode.
4486
4487 +++
4488 ** define-minor-mode now accepts arbitrary additional keyword arguments
4489 and simply passes them to defcustom, if applicable.
4490
4491 +++
4492 ** define-derived-mode by default creates a new empty abbrev table.
4493 It does not copy abbrevs from the parent mode's abbrev table.
4494
4495 +++
4496 ** `provide' and `featurep' now accept an optional second argument
4497 to test/provide subfeatures. Also `provide' now checks `after-load-alist'
4498 and runs any code associated with the provided feature.
4499
4500 +++
4501 ** Functions `file-name-sans-extension' and `file-name-extension' now
4502 ignore the leading dots in file names, so that file names such as
4503 `.emacs' are treated as extensionless.
4504
4505 +++
4506 ** Functions `user-uid' and `user-real-uid' now return floats if the
4507 user UID doesn't fit in a Lisp integer. Function `user-full-name'
4508 accepts a float as UID parameter.
4509
4510 ---
4511 ** `define-key-after' now accepts keys longer than 1.
4512
4513 +++
4514 ** The local variable `no-byte-compile' in elisp files is now obeyed.
4515
4516 +++
4517 ** The Emacs Lisp byte-compiler now displays the actual line and
4518 character position of errors, where possible. Additionally, the form
4519 of its warning and error messages have been brought more in line with
4520 the output of other GNU tools.
4521
4522 +++
4523 ** New functions `keymap-prompt' and `current-active-maps'.
4524
4525 ---
4526 ** New function `describe-buffer-bindings'.
4527
4528 +++
4529 ** New vars `exec-suffixes' and `load-suffixes' used when
4530 searching for an executable resp. an elisp file.
4531
4532 +++
4533 ** Variable aliases have been implemented:
4534
4535 *** defvaralias ALIAS-VAR BASE-VAR [DOCSTRING]
4536
4537 This function defines the symbol ALIAS-VAR as a variable alias for
4538 symbol BASE-VAR. This means that retrieving the value of ALIAS-VAR
4539 returns the value of BASE-VAR, and changing the value of ALIAS-VAR
4540 changes the value of BASE-VAR.
4541
4542 DOCSTRING, if present, is the documentation for ALIAS-VAR; else it has
4543 the same documentation as BASE-VAR.
4544
4545 *** indirect-variable VARIABLE
4546
4547 This function returns the variable at the end of the chain of aliases
4548 of VARIABLE. If VARIABLE is not a symbol, or if VARIABLE is not
4549 defined as an alias, the function returns VARIABLE.
4550
4551 It might be noteworthy that variables aliases work for all kinds of
4552 variables, including buffer-local and frame-local variables.
4553
4554 +++
4555 ** Functions from `post-gc-hook' are run at the end of garbage
4556 collection. The hook is run with GC inhibited, so use it with care.
4557
4558 +++
4559 ** If the second argument to `copy-file' is the name of a directory,
4560 the file is copied to that directory instead of signaling an error.
4561
4562 +++
4563 ** The variables most-positive-fixnum and most-negative-fixnum
4564 hold the largest and smallest possible integer values.
4565
4566 ---
4567 ** On MS Windows, locale-coding-system is used to interact with the OS.
4568 The Windows specific variable w32-system-coding-system, which was
4569 formerly used for that purpose is now an alias for locale-coding-system.
4570
4571 ---
4572 ** Functions y-or-n-p, read-char, read-key-sequence and the like, that
4573 display a prompt but don't use the minibuffer, now display the prompt
4574 using the text properties (esp. the face) of the prompt string.
4575
4576 ---
4577 ** New function x-send-client-message sends a client message when
4578 running under X.
4579
4580 +++
4581 ** Arguments for remove-overlays are now optional, so that you can remove
4582 all overlays in the buffer by just calling (remove-overlay).
4583
4584 ** New packages:
4585
4586 +++
4587 *** The new package gdb-ui.el provides an enhanced graphical interface to
4588 GDB. You can interact with GDB through the GUD buffer in the usual way, but
4589 there are also further buffers which control the execution and describe the
4590 state of your program. It separates the input/output of your program from
4591 that of GDB and watches expressions in the speedbar. It also uses features of
4592 Emacs 21 such as the display margin for breakpoints, and the toolbar.
4593
4594 Use M-x gdba to start GDB-UI.
4595
4596 *** The new package syntax.el provides an efficient way to find the
4597 current syntactic context (as returned by parse-partial-sexp).
4598
4599 *** The new package bindat.el provides functions to unpack and pack
4600 binary data structures, such as network packets, to and from Lisp
4601 data structures.
4602
4603 ---
4604 *** The TCL package tcl-mode.el was replaced by tcl.el.
4605 This was actually done in Emacs-21.1, and was not documented.
4606
4607 +++
4608 *** The new package button.el implements simple and fast `clickable buttons'
4609 in emacs buffers. `buttons' are much lighter-weight than the `widgets'
4610 implemented by widget.el, and can be used by lisp code that doesn't
4611 require the full power of widgets. Emacs uses buttons for such things
4612 as help and apropos buffers.
4613
4614 4580
4615 * Installation changes in Emacs 21.3 4581 * Installation changes in Emacs 21.3
4616 4582
4617 ** Support for GNU/Linux on little-endian MIPS and on IBM S390 has 4583 ** Support for GNU/Linux on little-endian MIPS and on IBM S390 has
4618 been added. 4584 been added.